Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ASME Code 2005 Updates, including changes to the material tables 1A.1B, 2A, 2B and the Yield Stress Table Added 2 new External Pressure charts Added change for the Flange Rigidity requirement in Appendix 2 Added ASCE 7-2002/95/98 and UBC-1997 Wind Codes for the Support Lug and Legs. Added ASCE 7-2002/95/98 and UBC-1997 Wind Codes for the horizontal vessels. Added the option of entering the loads in Sustained, Expansion and Occasional categories using the WRC-107 convention
system. Once, the loads are categorized they can be combined per ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 rules and compared with the allowables. The loads can be converted from one convention to another with a click of a button from the input screen.
Added an autosave feature that allows you to specify a time period in between saves. Saves can be silent or prompted. This feature is in the Tools->Configuration Menu Miscellaneous tab. Modified the input echo and output results from the Flange and Floating Head modules to be consistent with ASME
nomenclature.
Added the recommendation for the minimum gasket width in Floating Head calculations.
If the program is installed on the network, the batch file netuser.bat should be run from each users machine to register the required dlls. Otherwise some parts of PVElite will not function. Please note that periodically we will post fixes to the software on our web site at the location sited below. If you are having trouble with a particular calculation, check the COADE web site to see if there is a later version available that may fix your problem (also available from the PVElite Help menu). You should always run the latest version of the software.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contacting COADE We welcome your comments and suggestions regarding PVELITE. Problems, comments, and suggestions should be directed to the PVELITE development staff. Our current contact information is: (Phone) (Fax) (E-mail) (Web) 281-890-4566 281-890-3301 techsupport@coade.com http://www.coade.com
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
PREFACE
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
Licensor: COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 12777 Jones Road, Suite 480, Houston, Texas 77070
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed Program(s) from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights with regard to the Licensed Programs(s): 1 2 Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the License Program to be executed without a COADE External Software Lock (ESL). To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party acknowledges in writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so transferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Program(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Program(s) on any copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s). THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s) until terminated in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may terminate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License Agreement. You hereby agree upon such
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
PREFACE
termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Licensed Program(s) is with you. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdictions the above exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from one jurisdiction to another. COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free. COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on which the Licensed Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt. COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE's expense, as soon as possible after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those customers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning the Licensed Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or representing themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in this regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADE's entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be: 1 2 the replacement of any CD not meeting COADE's "Limited Warranty" as defined herein and which is returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a copy of your receipt, or if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you will be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).
IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, AND OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) EVEN IF COADE OR AN AUTHORIZED COADE DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS. FURTHERMORE, COADE DOES NOT PURPORT TO DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY DEFECTS IN THE DISKETTES OR OTHER PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY COADE PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or the Licensed Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, United States of America. The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the program. After the first 1year term, such updates and support are optional at the then current update fee. Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein shall be made by contacting COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones Road, Suite 480, Houston, Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.
DISCLAIMER
Copyright (c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2006, all rights reserved. This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. and is provided to the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner except as expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT IS THE USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE RESULTS OF THE PROGRAM.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
PREFACE
Title to and ownership of the intellectual property rights associated with the Software Application ADA any copies remain with COADE and its suppliers. PVElite user are hereby notified that Tech Soft America, L.L.C. 1301 Marina Village Parkway, Suite 300, Alameda CA 94501 ("Tech Soft America") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to PVElite users' use of the Software Application. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Tech Soft America and are enforceable by Tech Soft America in addition to COADE. In no event shall COADE or its suppliers be liable in any way for indirect, special or consequential damages of any nature, including without limitations, lost business profits, or liability or injury to third persons, whether foreseeable or not, regardless of whether COADE or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages.
TRADEMARKS
HOOPS' is a trademark of Tech Soft America, L.L.C. Windows (95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP), Access, SQL Server, Excel, Word are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle is a trademark of Oracle Corporation. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
PREFACE .........................................................................................................................................1 PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT....................................................................................................2 ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER...................................................2 LICENSE GRANT ............................................................................................................................2 TERM................................................................................................................................................2 LIMITED WARRANTY...................................................................................................................3 ENTIRE AGREEMENT ...................................................................................................................3 LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES ......................................................................................................3 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................4 DISCLAIMER...................................................................................................................................4 HOOPS' License Grant......................................................................................................................4 TRADEMARKS................................................................................................................................5
Chapter 1
Introduction
1-1
What is PVElite?....................................................................................................................................... 1-2 What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite? ............................................................................................. 1-3 What Distinguishes PVElite From our Competitors? ............................................................................... 1-4 What Applications are Available? ............................................................................................................ 1-5 About the Documentation ......................................................................................................................... 1-9 Program Support / User Assistance ........................................................................................................ 1-10 Updates ................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers.......................................................................................... 1-12
Chapter 2
2-1
Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2-2 System and Hardware Requirements ........................................................................................................ 2-3 External Software Lock ............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Starting the Installation Procedure............................................................................................................ 2-5 Installing PVElite...................................................................................................................................... 2-7 Network Installation / Usage .................................................................................................................. 2-10 Software Installation on a Network Drive ................................................................................... 2-10 ESL Installation on a Network................................................................................................................ 2-11 Novell File Server ESL Installation............................................................................................. 2-11 Novell Workstation ESL Installation........................................................................................... 2-11 Windows Server Installation ....................................................................................................... 2-11 Notes on Network ESLs ......................................................................................................................... 2-12
Chapter 3
Tutorial/Master Menu
3-1
Program Structure and Control ................................................................................................................. 3-2 A Road Map for PVELITE ....................................................................................................................... 3-3 The Input Processor .................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Other Input Processors.............................................................................................................................. 3-7 Error Checking........................................................................................................................................ 3-10 Analysis .................................................................................................................................................. 3-11 Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................. 3-12
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents Output Review and Report Generation................................................................................................... 3-13 Design and Analysis of Vessel Details ................................................................................................... 3-15 Input Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-18 Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-21 File Menu................................................................................................................................................ 3-22 Analyze Menu......................................................................................................................................... 3-25 Output Menu........................................................................................................................................... 3-26 Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................. 3-27 Create / Review Units.................................................................................................................. 3-33 Edit / Add Materials .................................................................................................................... 3-33 Calculator .................................................................................................................................... 3-35 Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................... 3-36 View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-37 Inspecting the Model in 3D .................................................................................................................... 3-40 ESL Menu............................................................................................................................................... 3-42 Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-43 PVElite Quick Start ................................................................................................................................ 3-44 Entering PVElite.......................................................................................................................... 3-44 Defining the Basic Vessel............................................................................................................ 3-45 Adding Details ........................................................................................................................................ 3-46 Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image .................................................................................. 3-47 Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints........................................................................ 3-49 Performing the Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 3-53 Reviewing the Results ............................................................................................................................ 3-54 Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details ................................................................................. 3-55 DXF File Generation Option .................................................................................................................. 3-58 Setting Up the Required Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-59 User Border Creation................................................................................................................... 3-59 DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime .................................................................................. 3-61 Invoking the Drawing.................................................................................................................. 3-61
Chapter 4
Element Data
4-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Element Basic Data................................................................................................................................... 4-3 Element's From Node .................................................................................................................... 4-3 Element's To Node ........................................................................................................................ 4-4 Element's Diameter........................................................................................................................ 4-4 Distance or Straight Flange Length ............................................................................................... 4-4 Finished Thickness ........................................................................................................................ 4-5 Corrosion Allowance..................................................................................................................... 4-5 Wind Load Diameter Multiplier .................................................................................................... 4-5 Material Name ............................................................................................................................... 4-5 Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams ...................................................... 4-6 Design Internal Pressure................................................................................................................ 4-6 Design Temperature for Internal Pressure ..................................................................................... 4-6 Design External Pressure............................................................................................................... 4-7 Design Temperature for External Pressure .................................................................................... 4-7 Swap Diameter Basis..................................................................................................................... 4-7 Element Additional Data .......................................................................................................................... 4-8 Cylindrical Shell ............................................................................................................................ 4-8 Elliptical Head ............................................................................................................................... 4-8 Head Factor ................................................................................................................................... 4-8 Inside Head Depth ......................................................................................................................... 4-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
Sump Head?................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Torispherical Head.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Crown Radius .............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Knuckle Radius ........................................................................................................................... 4-10 Sump Head?................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Spherical Head........................................................................................................................................ 4-11 Conical Head or Shell Segment................................................................................................... 4-11 To Node Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 Cone Length ................................................................................................................................ 4-11 Half Apex Angle.......................................................................................................................... 4-12 Toriconical................................................................................................................................... 4-12 Toricone Dialog........................................................................................................................... 4-12 Large End Knuckle Radius.......................................................................................................... 4-12 Large End Knuckle Thickness..................................................................................................... 4-13 Small End Knuckle Radius.......................................................................................................... 4-13 Sump Head?................................................................................................................................. 4-13 Welded Flat Head ................................................................................................................................... 4-14 Attachment Factor ....................................................................................................................... 4-14 Non-Circ. Small Diameter ........................................................................................................... 4-15 Appendix 14 Large Opening ....................................................................................................... 4-15 Flange Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 4-16 Body Flange................................................................................................................................. 4-16 Skirt Support with Basering.................................................................................................................... 4-17 Inside Diameter at Base............................................................................................................... 4-18 Basering Dialog ........................................................................................................................... 4-19 Flange Input Data ................................................................................................................................... 4-20 Basering Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 4-21 Brownell and Young Method of Design...................................................................................... 4-21 Tailing Lug Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 4-22 Tailing Lug Input Data ........................................................................................................................... 4-23 Perform Tailing Lug Analysis ..................................................................................................... 4-23 Tail Lug Type .............................................................................................................................. 4-23 Centerline Offset ......................................................................................................................... 4-23 Lug Thickness ............................................................................................................................. 4-23 Pin Hole Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 4-23 Weld Size Thickness ................................................................................................................... 4-23 Lug Height (only if no Top Ring)................................................................................................ 4-23 Discussion of Results................................................................................................................... 4-24
Chapter 5
5-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 5-2 Assigning Detail ....................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Detail Definition Buttons.......................................................................................................................... 5-5 Defining the Details .................................................................................................................................. 5-7 Rings......................................................................................................................................................... 5-8 Inside Diameter of Ring ................................................................................................................ 5-9 Outside Diameter of Ring.............................................................................................................. 5-9 Thickness of Ring.......................................................................................................................... 5-9 Ring Material................................................................................................................................. 5-9 Moment of Inertia.......................................................................................................................... 5-9 Cross Sectional Area ................................................................................................................... 5-10 Distance to Ring Centroid ........................................................................................................... 5-10 Name of Section Type ................................................................................................................. 5-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents Nozzle Dialog Data................................................................................................................................. 5-11 Nozzle Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Nozzle Input Data ................................................................................................................................... 5-13 Nozzle Description ...................................................................................................................... 5-13 Angle Between Nozzle and Shell ................................................................................................ 5-13 Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1) ................................................................. 5-13 Class for Attached B16.5 Flange ................................................................................................. 5-13 Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange ................................................................................................ 5-13 Modification of Reinforcing Limits............................................................................................. 5-14 Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit........................................................................... 5-14 Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit ......................................................................... 5-14 Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0 ..................................................................................... 5-14 Nozzle Material Specification ..................................................................................................... 5-14 Nozzle Diameter Basis ................................................................................................................ 5-15 Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle....................................................................................... 5-15 Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis ................................................................................................ 5-15 Actual Diameter and Thickness................................................................................................... 5-15 Nominal Diameter and Thickness ............................................................................................... 5-15 Minimum Diameter and Thickness ............................................................................................. 5-15 Actual Thickness of Nozzle......................................................................................................... 5-15 Nominal Schedule of Nozzle ....................................................................................................... 5-16 Nozzle Corrosion Allowance....................................................................................................... 5-16 Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes..................................................... 5-16 Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck.................................................................................................. 5-16 Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle ................................................................................................ 5-16 Nozzle Outside Projection ........................................................................................................... 5-16 Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad ........................................................ 5-16 Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel ................................................................... 5-17 Nozzle Inside Projection.............................................................................................................. 5-17 Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell ........................................................... 5-17 Local Shell Thickness.................................................................................................................. 5-17 Shell Tr Value.............................................................................................................................. 5-17 Tapped Hole Area Loss ............................................................................................................... 5-17 Overriding Nozzle Weight........................................................................................................... 5-18 Nozzle Orientation....................................................................................................................... 5-18 Additional Reinforcing Pad Data........................................................................................................... 5-27 Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface ............................................................................... 5-27 Pad Width .................................................................................................................................... 5-27 Pad Thickness.............................................................................................................................. 5-27 Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter ..................................................................................... 5-27 Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck ............................................................... 5-27 Pad Material................................................................................................................................. 5-27 ASME Code Weld Type.............................................................................................................. 5-27 Flange Type ................................................................................................................................. 5-28 Flange Material............................................................................................................................ 5-28 Lugs ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-29 Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint................................................................................. 5-29 Lug Bearing Width ...................................................................................................................... 5-29 Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate........................................................................................ 5-29 Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate........................................................................................... 5-30 Thickness of Bottom Plate........................................................................................................... 5-30 Distance between Gussets ........................................................................................................... 5-30 Mean Width of Gussets ............................................................................................................... 5-30 Height of Gussets ........................................................................................................................ 5-30 Thickness of Gussets ................................................................................................................... 5-30
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring .................................................................................................. 5-30 Thickness of Top Plate/Ring ....................................................................................................... 5-30 Overall Height of Lug.................................................................................................................. 5-30 Overall Width of Lug .................................................................................................................. 5-30 Weight of One Lug ...................................................................................................................... 5-30 Number of Lugs........................................................................................................................... 5-31 Perform WRC 107 Calc............................................................................................................... 5-31 Pad Width .................................................................................................................................... 5-31 Pad Thickness.............................................................................................................................. 5-31 Pad Length................................................................................................................................... 5-31 Weights ................................................................................................................................................... 5-32 Miscellaneous Weight ................................................................................................................. 5-32 Offset from Centerline................................................................................................................. 5-32 Is this a Welded Internal .............................................................................................................. 5-32 Forces and Moments............................................................................................................................... 5-33 Force in X, Y, or Z Direction ...................................................................................................... 5-33 Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis.................................................................................................... 5-33 Acts During Wind or Seismic...................................................................................................... 5-33 Force/Moment Combination Method .......................................................................................... 5-33 Platforms................................................................................................................................................. 5-34 Platform Start Angle (degrees) .................................................................................................... 5-34 Platform End Angle (degrees) ..................................................................................................... 5-34 Platform Wind Area..................................................................................................................... 5-35 Platform Weight .......................................................................................................................... 5-35 Platform Railing Weight.............................................................................................................. 5-35 Platform Grating Weight ............................................................................................................. 5-35 Platform Width ............................................................................................................................ 5-35 Platform Height ........................................................................................................................... 5-35 Platform Clearance ...................................................................................................................... 5-35 Platform Force Coefficient .......................................................................................................... 5-35 Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options] .................................................. 5-35 Platform Length (Non- Circular) ................................................................................................. 5-36 Saddles.................................................................................................................................................... 5-37 Width of Saddle........................................................................................................................... 5-37 Centerline Dimension (B)............................................................................................................ 5-37 Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) .................................................................................................. 5-38 Height of Composite Stiffener..................................................................................................... 5-38 Width of Wear Plate .................................................................................................................... 5-38 Thickness of Wear Plate .............................................................................................................. 5-38 Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees)............................................................................................ 5-38 Saddle Dimension A.................................................................................................................... 5-38 Perform Saddle Check ................................................................................................................. 5-38 Material Yield Stress ................................................................................................................... 5-38 E for Plates .................................................................................................................................. 5-38 Baseplate Length ......................................................................................................................... 5-38 Baseplate Width........................................................................................................................... 5-38 Baseplate Thickness .................................................................................................................... 5-39 Number of Ribs ........................................................................................................................... 5-39 Rib Thickness .............................................................................................................................. 5-39 Web Thickness ............................................................................................................................ 5-39 Web Location .............................................................................................................................. 5-39 Height of Center Web.................................................................................................................. 5-39 Trays ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-40 Number of Trays.......................................................................................................................... 5-40 Tray Spacing................................................................................................................................ 5-40
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents Tray Weight Per Unit Area.......................................................................................................... 5-40 Height of Liquid on Tray............................................................................................................. 5-40 Density of Liquid on Tray ........................................................................................................... 5-40 Legs ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-41 Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline ............................................... 5-41 Leg Orientation............................................................................................................................ 5-41 Number of Legs ........................................................................................................................... 5-42 Section Identifier ......................................................................................................................... 5-42 Length of Legs............................................................................................................................. 5-42 Vessel Translates During Occasional Load ................................................................................. 5-42 Packing ................................................................................................................................................... 5-43 Height of Packed Section ............................................................................................................ 5-43 Density of Packing ...................................................................................................................... 5-44 Liquid...................................................................................................................................................... 5-45 Height/Length of Liquid .............................................................................................................. 5-45 Liquid Density ............................................................................................................................. 5-45 Insulation ................................................................................................................................................ 5-47 Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing ................................................................................. 5-47 Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing ...................................................................................... 5-47 Insulation Density........................................................................................................................ 5-47 Lining...................................................................................................................................................... 5-49 Height/Length of Lining .............................................................................................................. 5-49 Thickness of Lining ..................................................................................................................... 5-49 Density of Lining......................................................................................................................... 5-49 Half Pipe Jacket ...................................................................................................................................... 5-50 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 5-50 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis............................................................................................ 5-50 Discussion of Input Data ............................................................................................................. 5-50
Chapter 6
6-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 6-2 Design Data .............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 Installation Options................................................................................................................................... 6-8 Design Modification ............................................................................................................................... 6-11 Nozzle Design Modifications ................................................................................................................. 6-14 Wind & Seismic Data ............................................................................................................................. 6-16 Wind Data............................................................................................................................................... 6-17 ASCE Wind Data.................................................................................................................................... 6-18 UBC Wind Data...................................................................................................................................... 6-20 NBC Wind Data...................................................................................................................................... 6-22 ASCE 95 Wind Data............................................................................................................................... 6-24 IS 875 Wind Code .................................................................................................................................. 6-27 User-Defined Wind Profile ..................................................................................................................... 6-29 Percent Wind for Hydrotest ......................................................................................................... 6-29 Wind Profile Data........................................................................................................................ 6-29 Mexican Wind Code 1993 ...................................................................................................................... 6-30 British Wind Code BS-6399 ................................................................................................................... 6-37 Seismic Data ........................................................................................................................................... 6-41 Seismic Design Code................................................................................................................... 6-41
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data........................................................................................................................ 6-42 ASCE7-93 Seismic Data......................................................................................................................... 6-44 UBC Seismic Data .................................................................................................................................. 6-45 NBC Seismic Data .................................................................................................................................. 6-47 India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM ............................................................................ 6-49 ASCE - 95 Seismic Data......................................................................................................................... 6-50 Seismic Load Input in G's....................................................................................................................... 6-51 UBC 1997 Earthquake Data.................................................................................................................... 6-52 IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters........................................................................................................... 6-54 Response Spectrum................................................................................................................................. 6-56
Chapter 7
PVElite Analysis
7-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 7-2 Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results ............................................................................... 7-3 Optional Steps........................................................................................................................................... 7-9 Component Analysis............................................................................................................................... 7-11
Chapter 8
Output/Review
8-1
Generating Output .................................................................................................................................... 8-2 The Review Screen ................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Using Review............................................................................................................................................ 8-4 Component Analysis................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Chapter 9
HEAT EXCHANGERS
9-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 9-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis......................................................................................................... 9-3 Analyzing Heat Exchangers...................................................................................................................... 9-4 Building Heat Exchangers ........................................................................................................... 9-11
Chapter 10
10-1
Purpose of this Chapter........................................................................................................................... 10-2 Starting CodeCalc from PVElite............................................................................................................. 10-3 Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 10-4 File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 10-5 Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 10-7 Analysis Menu............................................................................................................................. 10-8 Output Menu................................................................................................................................ 10-9 Tools Menu................................................................................................................................ 10-10 Diagnostic Menu ....................................................................................................................... 10-20 View Menu ................................................................................................................................ 10-21 ESL Menu.................................................................................................................................. 10-22 Help Menu ................................................................................................................................. 10-23 Performing an Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 10-24 Reviewing the Results - The Output Option ......................................................................................... 10-30 Printing or Saving Reports to a File .......................................................................................... 10-31
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel .................................................................................... 10-32 Tutorial Problem Printout ..................................................................................................................... 10-33
Chapter 11
SHELLS
11-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 11-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 11-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 11-5 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 11-5 Pop-up Input Fields ..................................................................................................................... 11-8 Results .................................................................................................................................................. 11-12 API 579 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 11-14 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis.................................................................................................... 11-15 Discussion of Input Data....................................................................................................................... 11-18 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 11-27 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 11-28 Jacket .................................................................................................................................................... 11-29
Chapter 12
NOZZLES
12-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 12-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 12-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 12-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 12-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 12-10 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 12-14 Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness ........................................................................................... 12-14 Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle................................................................................... 12-14 UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness ................................................................................ 12-14 Required and Available Areas ................................................................................................... 12-14 Selection of Reinforcing Pad ..................................................................................................... 12-15 Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations......................................................................................... 12-15 Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits ................................................................... 12-15 Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits ................................................................... 12-15 Minimum Design Metal Temperature ....................................................................................... 12-15 Weld Size Calculations.............................................................................................................. 12-15 Weld Strength Calculations ....................................................................................................... 12-16 Failure Path Calculations........................................................................................................... 12-16 Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area , And UG-45.................................................................... 12-16 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 12-17
Chapter 13
FLANGES
13-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 13-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 13-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 13-5 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 13-5 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 13-14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
Chapter 14
CONICAL SECTIONS
14-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 14-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 14-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 14-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 14-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 14-8 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 14-10 Internal Pressure Results ........................................................................................................... 14-10 External Pressure Results .......................................................................................................... 14-10 Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure................................................................ 14-10 Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure............................................................... 14-11 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 14-12
Chapter 15
FLOATING HEADS
15-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 15-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 15-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 15-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 15-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 15-13 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 15-14 Internal Pressure Results for the Head:...................................................................................... 15-14 External Pressure Results for Heads:......................................................................................... 15-14 Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head: ........................................................... 15-14 Required Thickness Calculations: ............................................................................................. 15-14 Soehren's Calculations:.............................................................................................................. 15-14 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 15-16
Chapter 16
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
16-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 16-2 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 16-3 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 16-3 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 16-7 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 16-16 Saddle Wear Plate Design..................................................................................................................... 16-17 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 16-20
Chapter 17
TUBESHEETS
17-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 17-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 17-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 17-6 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 17-6 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 17-18 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 17-31 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 17-36
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10
Contents
Chapter 18
WRC 107\FEA
18-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 18-2 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 18-3 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 18-3 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 18-8 WRC 107 Additional Input........................................................................................................ 18-15 FEA Additional Input ................................................................................................................ 18-16 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 18-18 WRC 107 Stress Calculations.................................................................................................... 18-18 WRC107 Stress Summations..................................................................................................... 18-20 ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle .................................................... 18-21 Finite Element Analysis (FEA): ................................................................................................ 18-23 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 18-25 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 18-27
Chapter 19
19-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 19-2 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 19-3 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 19-3 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 19-6 Vessel Leg Input ................................................................................................................................... 19-12 Leg Results ........................................................................................................................................... 19-14 Support Lug Input................................................................................................................................. 19-15 Lifting Lug Input .................................................................................................................................. 19-18 Output ................................................................................................................................................... 19-21 Baseplate Input ..................................................................................................................................... 19-22 Main Input Fields ...................................................................................................................... 19-22 Baseplate Results .................................................................................................................................. 19-25 Trunnion Input ...................................................................................................................................... 19-26 Main Input Fields ...................................................................................................................... 19-26 Trunnion Results................................................................................................................................... 19-29 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 19-30
Chapter 20
20-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 20-2 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 20-3 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 20-3 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 20-5 Output ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-8 Example .................................................................................................................................................. 20-9
Chapter 21
BASE RINGS
21-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 21-2 Calculations ............................................................................................................................................ 21-3 Calculation Techniques ............................................................................................................... 21-3 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 21-9 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 21-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
11
Pop-up Input Fields ................................................................................................................... 21-14 Tailing Lug Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 21-16 Discussion of Input ............................................................................................................................... 21-17 Tailing Lug Input....................................................................................................................... 21-17 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 21-18 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 21-19
Chapter 22
THIN JOINTS
22-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 22-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 22-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 22-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 22-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 22-8 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 22-11
Chapter 23
THICK JOINTS
23-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 23-2 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 23-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 23-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 23-9 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 23-10 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 23-11
Chapter 24
ASME TUBESHEETS
24-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 24-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 24-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 24-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 24-4 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 24-16 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 24-26 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 24-28
Chapter 25
HALF-PIPES
25-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 25-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 25-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 25-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 25-4 Discussion of Results.............................................................................................................................. 25-7 Example .................................................................................................................................................. 25-9
Chapter 26
LARGE OPENINGS
26-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 26-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 26-3 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 26-4 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 26-4 Example Problem.................................................................................................................................... 26-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12
Contents
Chapter 27
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
27-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 27-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 27-3 Discussion of Input Data....................................................................................................................... 27-10 Main Input Fields ...................................................................................................................... 27-10 Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 27-14 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 27-18 Ligament Efficiency Calculations ............................................................................................. 27-18 Reinforcement Calculations ...................................................................................................... 27-18 Stress Calculations..................................................................................................................... 27-18 Allowable Calculations.............................................................................................................. 27-19 Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations.......................................................................... 27-19 MAWP Calculations.................................................................................................................. 27-19 External Pressure Calculations .................................................................................................. 27-19 Example Problem.................................................................................................................................. 27-20
Chapter 28
WRC 297/ANNEX G
28-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 28-2 Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 28-3 Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 28-3 Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G...................................................................................... 28-7 Sample Calculation ................................................................................................................................. 28-9 Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 28-10
Chapter 29
Appendix Y
29-1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 29-2 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 29-3 Gasket and Gasket Factors...................................................................................................................... 29-4 Example .................................................................................................................................................. 29-5
Chapter 30
Miscellaneous Topics
30-1
Heading Edit ........................................................................................................................................... 30-2 Heading Manipulation and Material Properties ...................................................................................... 30-3 Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 30-6 Input Data .................................................................................................................................... 30-6 Nominal Density of this Material ................................................................................................ 30-9 P Number Thickness.................................................................................................................... 30-9 Yield Stress, Operating................................................................................................................ 30-9 UCS-66 Chart Number ................................................................................................................ 30-9 External Pressure Chart Name..................................................................................................... 30-9 Carbon Steel Materials .............................................................................................................. 30-10 Heat Treated Materials .............................................................................................................. 30-10 Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials ...................................................................................... 30-10 Non Ferrous Materials ............................................................................................................... 30-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Contents
13
Chapter 31
31-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
Chapter 1 Introduction
In This Chapter
What is PVElite?.........................................................................1-2 What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite? ...............................1-3 What Distinguishes PVElite From our Competitors? .................1-4 What Applications are Available? ..............................................1-5 About the Documentation ...........................................................1-9 Program Support / User Assistance.............................................1-10 Updates .......................................................................................1-11 COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers ..............................1-12
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-2
Introduction
What is PVElite?
PVElite is a PC-based pressure vessel design and analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by COADE Engineering Software. PVElite is a package of nineteen applications for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and heat exchangers, and fitness for service assessments. The purpose of the program is to provide the mechanical engineer with easy to use, technically sound, well documented reports with detailed calculations and supporting comments, which will speed and simplify the task of vessel design, re-rating or fitness for service. The popularity of PVElite is a reflection of COADE's expertise in programming and engineering, as well as COADE's dedication to service and quality.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-4
Introduction
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-5
General Vessels
Enables users to perform wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic combinations of pressure, deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules, PD 5500, and EN-13445. These calculations address minimum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress (both tension and compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load combinations.
Nozzles
Calculates required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules and including tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The program checks the weld sizes, calculates the strength of reinforcement and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle. Hillside, tangential and Y-angle nozzles can also be evaluated.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-6
Introduction
Conical Sections
Performs internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Complete area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the cone under both internal and external pressure are included.
Floating Head
Performs internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1 rules. The program also enables users to use an additional calculation technique allowed by the Code - Soehrens calculation.
Flanges
Performs stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. This program both designs and analyzes the following types of flanges: All integral flange types Slip on flanges and all loose flange types with hubs Ring type flanges and all loose flange types without hubs Blind flanges, both circular and non-circular TEMA channel covers Reverse geometry weld neck flanges Flat faced flanges with full face gaskets Users can input the external forces and moments acting on the flange and alternate mating flange loads.
Horizontal Vessels
Performs stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the L.P. Zick method. Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel and in the heads. Stiffening rings used in the design of the vessel are also evaluated. Wind and seismic loadings are also considered. Additionally, the saddle, webs and baseplate are checked for external seismic and wind loads. Users can also specify friction and additional longitudinal forces on the vessel.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-7
ASME Code. A full table of 929 AISC beams, channels and angles is included in the program. WRC 107 analysis to check local vessel stresses around the trunnion and the support lug is also available from within this module. Various wind and seismic codes are available for Leg and Lug supported vessels.
WRC 107/FEA
Calculates stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the method of P.P. Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, including a stress comparison to VIII Div. 2 allowables for 3 different loading conditions. This module also contains an interface to the Finite Analysis Program (Nozzle Pro from The Paulin Research Group).
Baserings
Performs stress and thickness evaluation for skirts and baserings. Results from both the neutral axis shift and simplified method for basering required thickness is reported. Required skirt thickness due to weight loads and bending moments are also displayed. Tailing Lugs attached to the basering can also be analyzed.
Thin Joints
Performs stress and life cycle evaluation for thin walled expansion joints (bellows kind) in accordance with ASME VIII Div. 1 appendix 26.
Thick Joints
Performs stress, life cycle and spring rate calculations for flanged and flued expansion joints in accordance with ASME VIII Div. 1 appendix 5. The spring rate computation is per TEMA eighth edition.
ASME Tubesheets
Determines required thickness of tubesheets for fixed, floating or U-tube exchangers per the ASME Code Section VIII division 1 section UHX. You can use the program to analyze multiple loads cases for both the corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Half-Pipe
Determines required thickness and MAWP for half-pipe jacketed vessels per the ASME Code Section VIII division 1 appendix EE.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-8
Introduction
Large Openings
Analyzes large openings in integral flat heads per the ASME Code Section VIII division 1 appendix 2 and appendix 14. Required thickness, MAWP and weights are computed for geometries with or without an attached nozzle.
Rectangular Vessels
Analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 and Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are analyzed for internal pressure, including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a diametral staying plate. All membrane and bending stresses are computed and compared to the appropriate allowables.
Appendix Y Flanges
Performs a stress evaluation of Class1 category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form identical flange pairs, according to the latest version of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y.
Summary
Displays a description and evaluation of all the components of a pressure vessel or heat exchanger. Design pressure, temperature, material, actual thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure are shown for each component.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-10
Introduction
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-11
Updates
The version number identifies the PVElite update set. The current release of PVElite is Version 2006. COADE schedules and distributes these updates every January. The purchase price includes unlimited access to PVElite and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1-12
Introduction
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-2
Overview
PVElite is installed on the system hard disk using the program setup located on the CD. The installation program has been designed to allow total installations, diagnostic checks of the installation and ease of updating. This section will explain the process of running the PVElite setup application. For users upgrading to a new version of PVElite, the installation program can be instructed to place the new files in the same directory where the current version resides. The new version files will overwrite the old version files where appropriate. PVElite can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. It is recommended that job files be kept in one or more data or project directories separate from the installation directory. The installation process consists of the following steps: 1 2 3 4 5 Copying of files from the program CD to the hard disk. Extraction of PVElite from these compressed files. Verification of the extracted files. Installation of the External Software Lock (ESL) drivers. Configuring of PVElite.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-6
The next screen prompts for the folder where PVElite is to be installed. Users may modify and control the folder by clicking Browse. The folder may be the location of an existing PVElite installation, or a new location. This starts the installation process by prompting you to place the CD in the CD drive and clicking Next. Add/Remove Programs searches for the SETUP.EXE file located on the CD and prompts the user for verification of the file to be installed. Clicking Finish runs the setup program.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-7
Installing PVElite
Launch the installation routine by responding to the on-screen prompts and then clicking Next.
The Destination Folder dialog prompts users for the folder where PVElite will be installed. Click Change...&to specify a different folder than the default folder C:\Program Files\COADE\PVElite\. The folder may be the location of an existing PVElite installation or a new location.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-8
Select the ESL color. Selecting the correct ESL color ensures that the correct drivers are loaded during installation.
After selecting the ESL color, the Next button becomes enabled and allows users to continue the installation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-9
Click Install and installation will begin. When installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog displays.
Click Show me the readme file if you wish to review information regarding the new version or click Finish to conclude the installation
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-11
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming supervisor rights.
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the network drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note however, the workstation must always be up and running for users to access the software.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2-12
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-2
Tutorial/Master Menu
Most files in the data subdirectories are identified by a user-defined filename with a given extension. The remaining files hold data controlling the program's operation. These files and their description follow:
jobname.PVI jobname.TAB jobname.T80 jobname.CCI units.FIL *.BIN UMAT1.BIN PVElite input file Temporary results file Results file used by the output review processor Input file for component analysis User units file (relating user's units and program units) PVElite Material Database Binary file holding the user-defined materials
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-4
Tutorial/Master Menu
The Input screen has a Main Menu across the top, which controls navigation through the processor. These items File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, etc. may be accessed directly from this menu at any point in the processor. In a row directly below the Main Menu is a series of toolbars and buttons specific to the current screen. In the screen above, the buttons manipulate the elements (Insert, Delete, Update), specify unique data (Material, Share), or change the view or input method (Zoom, Layout view). The three toolbars control the data file, add elements and add details to the current element. These toolbars and buttons may be relocated on the screen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-5
The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Basic Data, a table of the Element Additional Data (when required) and the graphic area which contains an image of the current status of the entire vessel or the current element. A status bar displays across the bottom of the screen and displays the element count, the position and orientation of the current element, quick internal pressure calculations for the current element. How are the menu selections made? How are the buttons pushed? How is the data entered? Most operations are obvious when using a mouse; point to the item and click the left mouse button to open drop down menus from the menu line, activate the button commands, pick a tool or move control to one of the screen areas. All buttons and toolbars have tool tips, which are activated when the mouse rests on the button. When users click in the data area(s), the Tab key moves the highlight (and control) through its input cells. In most element data areas, Enter registers the data and will move the focus to the next field. The exception is at combo boxes where clicking the arrow displays the available choices. An example of a combo box is found on the Input screen shown on the previous page where the element is chosen from a list of available types. Throughout the program, [F1] displays help for the highlighted data item. Once familiar with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands will provide the most efficient navigation through the program. Some of the data input in PVElite is controlled through a data grid. To enter the data click the mouse on the data text, such as Inside Diameter, and type the input value. The cursor will not blink over the numeric/alphanumeric values until typing has begun. After the data is entered, press the Enter or Tab to proceed. Arrow keys can also be used to navigate between the input fields. Note: The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic. Combo boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-6
Tutorial/Master Menu
When the graphics area of the Input screen is active, a few more keys are available. No special highlight will appear but the string PgUp/PgDn/Home/End will display at the bottom graphics area. This indicates that these keys are now active. The image in the graphics area shows the current state of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the details on these elements. One element is highlighted. This is the current element and the element data (Element Basic Data and Element Additional Data) shown on the screen defines this element. By pressing PgUp or PgDn, the highlight changes from one element to the next through the vessel. Press the Home and End keys to move the highlight to the first and last elements in the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button while selecting the element will also highlight it. Once an element is highlighted detail information for that element may be accessed. With the mouse, click the right mouse button for the existing detail image to display. To add details to the current element, click the appropriate detail on the toolbar and enter the necessary data.
Once the control of this screen is understood, all the remaining input processors will present no difficulties as they all have the same control structure with mouse and keyboard commands.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-7
Input Menu
Other than the Vessel Data there are four other categories of vessel input, which must be addressed - Component Analysis Data, Report Headings, the Vessel Design or Analysis guidelines, and live (Wind and Seismic) load definitions. These input topics are part of the tabbed input data view. Please note that these tabs can be organized and moved. The Design/Analysis Constraints data is important here as this is where the overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled. Finished thickness is a required input for each vessel element but users may allow the program to increase the element thickness so that each element passes the requirements for internal pressure, external pressure, the combined loads of pressure, dead and live loads. Remember that the status bar lists internal pressure information about the current element including the required thickness. A switch is also available to locate stiffener rings on the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements. The Component Analysis Data option allows users to enter data and analyze without building a vessel. These are COADE's CodeCalc analysis modules, some of which are not incorporated directly into PVElite. CodeCalc, COADE's popular vessel component analysis package is included in PVElite through the Component Analysis menu option. Users can launch the input data screens by clicking the tab associated with a specific item. Notice the tabs at the bottom of the Design/Analysis Constraints Screen graphic shown below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-8
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-10
Tutorial/Master Menu
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For example, the processor will create an error message if the user tries to specify a nozzle 20 feet from the bottom of a 10-foot shell element. Not all data can be confirmed on input. For that reason, a general error processor is executed prior to the analysis. This error processor can be run in a stand-alone mode as well. The error checker may be accessed from the Analyze menu. In addition to the notes that are presented on the screen during error checking, these error messages appear in the output report, are accessible through the output review processor. As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst must use common sense to insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D graphics as it reveals obvious errors.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-11
Analysis
PVElite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The program also provides direct design capabilities with which the wall thickness of individual elements is increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure and longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINT specification under Design Modification. For more information see DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINTS. A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags for Select t for ... are all unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program will automatically increase the wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. The user's input in the resulting output report is automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addition to wall thickness, a fourth flag can be set - Select Stiffener Rings for External Pressure. In this case, rather than increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings are added to the model input for this analysis. PVElite will analyze each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal and external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN-13445 rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to four categories of vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake. These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce the default set of 17 load cases that are found in the DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINTS processor. For each load case, PVElite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress around the circumference of the elements and compare these values to the allowable stress for the material, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the vessel wall exceed the design limits, PVElite will proceed according to the design modification settings in the input. Once the program finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program design modifications. If PVElite changed any data, then the program automatically re-runs the complete analysis to review the impact of the changes. There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These controls, however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job. Instead, these seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the Data sub-directory. These controls are viewed and modified through the Tools menu item on the Main Menu. Here, click Configuration to display the Setup Parameters dialog.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-12
Tutorial/Master Menu
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-13
These are some reports available from PVElite. Depending on the type, position and geometry the list of reports will vary.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-14
Tutorial/Master Menu
Step 0 Cover Title Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Cone 1-N Nozl 1-N Step 21 Step 22
Vessel Element Error Checking Cover Sheet Title Page Vessel Input Echo XY Coordinate Calculations Internal Pressure Calculations External Pressure Calculations Weight of Elements & Details ANSI Flange MAWP Natural Frequency Calculations Forces & Moments Applied to Vessel Wind Load Calculation Earthquake Load Calculation Wind and Earthquake Shear, Bending Wind Deflection Longitudinal Stress Constants Longitudinal Allowable Stresses Longitudinal Stresses Due to Load Components Stress Due to Combined Loads Basering Calculations Center of Gravity Calculation Conical Sections Nozzle Calculations Nozzle Summary Vessel Design Summary
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-16
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-18
Tutorial/Master Menu
Input Menu
Input Menu
The Input menu controls the general input processes. The following options are available:
Description
Vessel Data, Report Headings, Data items located on the tabbed dialog pallette as shown Design/Analysis Constraints, Load below. Click the desired tab to view of change the input for Cases, Wind Loads, and Seismic that set of data items. Loads Component Analysis Data Includes those (CodeCalc) processors, which are not integrated into the main vessel analysis. These processors are described in Chapters 9 thorough 28. Allows users to input and edit a three line heading, which will be placed in the first three lines of each report page. It will also print on the title page of the report. A 60-line heading can also be entered. Allows users to input and edit the global data, which includes the general vessel description, design control data and the structural load analyses to be performed. This is where ASME Section VIII Division 1, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN-13445 is specified as the design code. If the user does not select this option, the program will set the default data. Note that the vessel design code can be changed from the Design Code pull down on the Units/Code toolbar. Displays the detail data in Excel grid style format.
Report Headings
Design/Analysis Constraints
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-19
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-20
Tutorial/Master Menu Live Load DataThis option switches to the wind or seismic data edit mode where the wind loads and seismic loads are defined through the specification of the appropriate load parameters.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-21
Main Menu
PVElite starts with the Vessel Data Input screen. Across the top of this screen is a line of items called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions of the program. This chapter reviews the functions available in each of these menu items.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-22
Tutorial/Master Menu
File Menu
File Menu
File options control the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed in the menu with an ellipsis () cause a file manage window to appear when selected. The following options are available from the Main Menu item - File:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-23
New - There is a choice for selecting the design code. When one is selected this will start a new file.
File New...
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-24
Tutorial/Master Menu
Save As Dialog
Description Allows the user to either save a file that has not been named or to save the current file under another name. Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a printer. Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above) Displays the standard Windows printer setup screen. Exits PVElite. A message window will display prompting to save any changes to the current job.
Description Stores the vessel image in a standard PCX format file. This file can be printed at a later date or added to other documents. The name of the PCX file defaults to the name of the current job with the extension of PCX. Builds a PCX file for later manipulation and printing. In this case, the entire contents of the screen are saved in the file.
Screen to PCX
The File Menu will also list the last several vessel input files. Any of these files may be opened with a mouse click.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-25
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
Description This option saves the input data and begins error checking. If no errors are detected, the program will continue the analysis process. A description of the PVElite analysis is found in Chapter 7 of this user guide. The output from the analysis processor, whether error messages or results, may be examined in the Output Processor. Once an analysis is completed, the program will automatically switch to the Output Review processor. This option will only process the error checking, and will not implement the analysis process. The error report may be examined in the Review option found in the Output item from this Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-26
Tutorial/Master Menu
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output menu enables users to review the analysis results and print the graphics of the vessel using the following options:
Description Reviews the analysis results of the current job, if these results are already available. Launches any program capable of viewing this file type on the computer system.
Review the Access Database If a database has been created, it can be reviewed directly using Microsoft Access.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-27
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools menu controls utility processors. Options that display on the menu with '...' cause a window to appear when selected. Configuration allows the user to define a variety of system variables for the program:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-28
Tutorial/Master Menu
Configuration Dialog
These controls let you set some options in some programs that control the results of some computations. Following is a description of the options:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-29
The program will increase the thickness of an element if you specify for it to do so in the Design/Analysis Constraints, and the element thickness is inadequate. If this directive is not checked then no thickness rounding will be performed.
Use EigenSolver
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than 1 method. The traditional method is the analysis technique of Freese or Rayleigh-Ritz. For the skirt-supported freestanding structure, this method provides acceptable results. When the support configuration is not the skirt/base type such as legs, lugs, or intermediate skirt, this analysis may not provide accurate results. To solve this problem generically, PVElite has a natural frequency solver that uses numerical methods to solve the general equations motion. Namely, the program must solve the following: [ [K] - w 2[M]] {a}={0}. Which for the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-30
Tutorial/Master Menu
general case is a set of n homogeneous (right hand side equal to zero, in this case abs[ [K] - w 2[M]] {a}=0. This requires an iterative solution. After building a stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrix of the model with appropriate boundary conditions (anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, at support lugs etc.) the program can extract a number of modes that is meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem, particularly the modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic frequency Eigensolution method, PVElite can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration codes. The natural frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic method. For PVElite files earlier than 4.3, the default is to use the Freese method. The default version for 4.3 and later is to use the EigenSolver. Enable or disable this box as necessary.
Use Bolt Load Instead of Bolt Area Times Bolt Allowable Stress
This option may be used in the design of annular baserings. Choosing this option will instruct PVElite to use the computed value of the bolt load instead of the bolt area times its allowable stress. Checking this box will lead to a less conservative basering/bolting/chair cap thickness calculation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-31
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-32
Tutorial/Master Menu
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions: 3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less 2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches If your geometry meets this criteria and this parameter is not checked, then the nozzle reinforcement areas and MAWPs will not be computed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-33
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-34
Tutorial/Master Menu
button. Next enter the material properties under the General and the Stresses
button to add another material if desired. When all of the materials have been entered, click
the button to add these materials to the end of the materials supplied in the PVElite material database. The material list from the main database can also be imported into this processor. A material from this list can be imported into the user material database. Use the button on the toolbar to accomplish this task.
In addition to adding materials to the ASME Databases, it is also possible to add materials to the PD 5500 / EN 13445 database. When the option to edit this database is selected, the following screen appears:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-35
To use this processor, click the button. Next enter the Material Name, Yield Strength and other fields. Next fill in the table of stress versus temperature. This processor creates a user material database that is stored in the PVElite\System subdirectory. Once the database has been saved after the initial use, those materials will be available for editing.
Calculator
Launches the Windows calculator and optionally pastes the results in the input at the cursor location.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-36
Tutorial/Master Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Description This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied PVElite files. This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-37
View Menu
View Menu
The View menu allows users to specify the toolbars to be displayed. The following options are available: Standard BarAllows the user to open, save and print. Additionally, users can access PVElite version and contact information. The contains
Standard Bar
Element BarAllows users to create a vessel with the default data by clicking an icon on the Element Toolbar. The following options are available:
Element Bar
Detail BarAllows users to add certain details i.e., stiffeners, nozzles, forces, moments, lining, half-pipe jackets and tubesheets etc. to the current element when applicable. The following options are available:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-38
Tutorial/Master Menu
Detail Bar
Utility BarEnables users to insert, delete, update, share and flip elements.
Utility Bar
Auxiliary BarAllows manipulation of the model, create drawings and databases and others.
Auxiliary Bar
Pipe Properties - Enables users to access the database of pipe dimensions. After clicking OK, the current diameter and thickness will be replaced with the current selection. List Dialog - Obtain a list of the vessel's details. Items can be added or removed from the list.
List Dialog
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-39
The List dialog allows the editing of some types of vessel details. One feature of the list is that the location of the detail can be specified from the datum position. To use the list dialog, select the type of detail to edit by pressing its tab. Then simply enter the data as necessary for each cell. If the list is empty, then press the plus button (+) to add a row. The entry of the "From Node" is optional. The program will assign that value automatically. The description is a required mandatory input. If it is not entered, the program will treat that row as if it did not exist and that data will be lost. All of the other data must be entered as required. Rows of data can be duplicated from one row to the next. Click on the listing number of the item to copy. That row should turn black (selected). Next copy the data to the clipboard by pressing [Ctrl-C]. Next paste it to a blank line by using [Ctrl-V]. Next change any data that might be different for that detail. Status Bar - Displays a variety of critical information about the current vessel component such as MAWP and required thickness.
Status Bar
Split - Allows the user to split the screen for simultaneous viewing of the 2D and 3D graphics as well as the information for the current element.
Analyze Bar - Allows the user to analyze the current model, review previous results, error-check the model, or review the previously created DXF file.
Analyze Bar
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-40
Tutorial/Master Menu
3D View Icons
Description Changes the current view to front, back, top, bottom, left, or right view. Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window. Allows users to use the mouse to draw a window around the portion of the model that you want to zoom in on. This is a rubber band zoom. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Allows users to rotate the model using the mouse. Click the right mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the model. Allows users to translate the model in the direction the mouse is dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it down while moving the mouse will also pan the model. Enables users to zoom in or out. Click this button then press the left mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to zoom in or out. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Allows the selection of a detail for further manipulation. This is the cursor icon.
Orbit Pan
Zoom Camera
Select by Click
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-41
Description Enables users to insert a cutting plane when you click this button and then click anywhere in the window. Users can then rotate the cutting plane after it has been initiated. The rotating plane will then expose the various layers of the vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned off once the view is set. To restore the model, right click in the 3D window and choose the Delete Cutting Plane option. Many operations are supported using the Options menu. After being set, the program will recall them in subsequent sessions. This option is also available by right clicking on the model window and selecting properties. The Options dialog displays below.
Options
3D Options
While in 3D view a detail's dialog can be requested by double clicking on it. It may be necessary to click the cursor icon beforehand.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-42
Tutorial/Master Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu provides access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock.
ESL Menu
ESL Menu Option Show Data Phone Update Generate Access Codes
Description Displays the data stored on the ESL. Allows the user to obtain phone update authorization information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone. Generates access codes for remote ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for generation of authorization codes. Allows users to choose this option to enter the remote authorization codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the data stored on your ESL. Installs the software needed check for the standalone ESL Installs the HASP device driver
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-43
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support for PVElite. The options available are as follows: Tip of the Day PVElite Help Topics On-Line Documentation PVElite Quick Start Foundation 3D Help Check for Updates On-Line Registration About PVElite Provides tips for running PVElite. Starts the help facility. View this manual online. A quick start guide for new users. Review the foundation 3D interface specification. This option will check COADE's web site for a later build of the current version. You must have live Internet connection for this to work. Register this product electronically with COADE. Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support, and provides a link to COADE's Web Site.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-44
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-45
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-46
Tutorial/Master Menu
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calculations but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as element details. Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as details on the various elements. PVElite will calculate the weight of each of these items and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs are also used to locate support points on the vesselimportant data for load calculations. Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight (make current) the element, which will hold the detail and click the appropriate DETAIL button. Allowing the cursor to rest on the toolbar button will produce a fly out definition of the button. Select the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. Use the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested data. Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-47
The vessel graphic may also be sent directly to the printer by clicking Print on the File menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-48
Tutorial/Master Menu
Graphics to PCX
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-49
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-50
Tutorial/Master Menu
Pressure
NP - No Pressure IP - Internal Pressure EP - External Pressure HP - Hydrostatic Pressure
Weight
EW - Empty Weight OW - Operating Weight HW - Hydrostatic Weight CW - Empty Weight No CA
Live Load
WI - Wind EQ - Earthquake HI - Wind at Hydrostatic Weight conditions HE - Earthquake at Hydrostatic Weight conditions VF - Vortex Shedding Filled VO - Vortex Shedding Operating VE - Vortex Shedding Empty WE - Wind Bending Empty New and Cold WF - Wind Bend Filled New and Cold CW - Axial Weight Stress New and Cold FS - Axial Stress, seismic PW - Axial Stress Wind
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-51
Wind and earthquake information can be entered by clicking the Wind Data or Seismic Data tabs. PVElite generates live loads based on the criteria established by one of many standards, including - the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the (Canadian) National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads may also be specified directly by the user as a wind pressure profile. PVElite references these codes for live loads only. ASME Section VIII or PD 5500 rules apply for all other calculations. The screen below shows the data required for the default codes. PVElite will use these criteria to set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment on each element of the vessel.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-52
Tutorial/Master Menu
Once the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for error processing and analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-53
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-54
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-55
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-56
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-57
Shell/Head Results
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-58
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-59
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-60
Tutorial/Master Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3-61
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-2
Element Data
Introduction
PVElite has eight basic element types from which all vessels are constructed. PVElite terms for these elements are as follows:
Cylindrical Elliptical Torispherical Spherical Conical Welded Flange Skirt Cylindrical Shell Elliptical Head Torispherical Head Spherical Head or Shell Conical or Shell Segment Welded Flat Head Body Flange Skirt Support with Base Ring
PVElite does not require the complete construction of a vessel for the analysis. Individual elements or groups of elements may be defined and at least partially analyzed. Only complete vessels, that is, vessels with proper supports, can be analyzed for deadweight and live loads. Except for the skirt element, all elements can be used to create either horizontal or vertical vessels. Models for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top and models for horizontal vessels are built from left to right. The vessel orientation is established with the first element. If starting with a skirt, it's a vertical vessel. If starting with a head, the head may be "flipped" between a bottom head (vertical model) and a left head (horizontal model) by clicking the FLIP button. Once the second element is added to the model, the orientation is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel supports that are modeled as elements. Other supports such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles for horizontal vessels are modeled as "details" on the elements. These vessel details are in the next chapter.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-4
Element Data
The 'From' node number for this element will also be used to define details such as nozzles, insulation, and packing which are associated with this element. The location of the 'To' node will be calculated by the program by adding the length of this element to the location of the 'From' node. The From and To nodes establish the overall organization of the vessel. When creating a vessel model in the BUILD mode, node numbers are automatically assigned to each element. The BUILD mode starts with node 10 and increments by 10 throughout the vessel. When DELETEing elements, the program will "reconnect" the vessel elements by changing the From node of the following element to the To node of the previous element. When INSERTing elements, PVElite will ask for the new (added) To node number and again "reconnect" the elements so that the From and To nodes match with the previous and next elements in the model. The program defines a vertical vessel from the bottom to the top. If the vertical vessel were on a skirt, the first element would be the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element would be a head and the legs or lugs are defined as details on the appropriate shell element. The program defines a horizontal vessel from the left end to the right end. The first element in a horizontal vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details on the appropriate shell element.
Element's To Node
This is the number associated with the starting point of this element, the 'From' node. Note that the program will generate this value automatically.
Element's Diameter
Enter the appropriate diameter of the element. The diameter may be specified as either ID or OD. Click Swap Diameter Basis to flip in between ID and OD. For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, this should be the diameter of the straight flange. For cones, this is the diameter at the From node end. For flanges, this is the diameter of the body flange. For blind flanges this should always be the OD. For skirts, this is the diameter at the top of the skirt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-5
For a cylindrical shell, enter the length of the shell from seam to seam. For an elliptical or torispherical head enter the length of the straight flange. The straight flange length cannot equal zero. For a spherical head the distance can be zero. For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including tori-conical sections, if any) from seam to seam. For a welded flat head, enter the thickness of the head. For a body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including the weld neck, if any. For a skirt support, enter the distance from the bottom of the basering to the skirt/head/shell seam.
Finished Thickness
Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. Note that the corrosion allowance is automatically subtracted from this thickness by the program and should not be subtracted by the user. For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal thickness of the plate used in order to take into account the thinning of the head due to forming. For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness. For welded flat heads, enter the through thickness of the flange portion, but do not include the hub and weld neck. For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. For cylindrical skirts made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill undertolerance from the nominal pipe wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The analysis program will subtract this value from the entered thickness and add this value to inside diameter.
Material Name
Enter the material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the Material Database by clicking the [Mat] button from the toolbar. Selecting one of the material
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-6
Element Data
names from the list will display the significant material parameters for the analysis. If the current element temperature is outside the valid temperature range for the material, the material may not be specified or selected. (Likewise, a temperature may not be entered if it exceeds the limits for the material.) Pressing Enter while on this field will display the material properties of the current element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are directly from the program's material database; otherwise the data is from the data structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in the program's material database, the program will assume that it is a user-defined material, in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-8
Element Data
Cylindrical Shell
There is no additional data for cylinders.
Elliptical Head
Head Factor
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. A value of 2 is typical, that is, the major axis (vessel diameter) is twice the minor axis (two times the head height). For example, a 60-inch diameter elliptical head would extend 15 inches beyond the straight flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-9
Sump Head?
Check the box to indicate that this element is a sump head. When the pulldown is active the program will list all available nozzles. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The best strategy is to completely define all of the elements and details and then create the sump element last.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-10
Element Data
Torispherical Head
Crown Radius
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The crown radius is 'L' in this figure. For PD:5500, this is equal to the outside diameter of crown section of torispherical end measured to tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure 3.5.2.1.
Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for the toroidal portion of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is equal to 6 percent of the crown radius. Allowable values range from 6 percent of the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown radius (hemispherical head). See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The knuckle radius is r' in this figure.
Sump Head?
Check the box to indicate that this element is a sump head. When the pulldown is active the program will list all available nozzles. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The best strategy is to completely define all of the elements and details and then create the sump element last.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-11
Spherical Head
Conical Head or Shell Segment
To Node Diameter
The diameter entered in the Element Basic Data for a cone is the inside diameter of the cone at the 'From' end of the cone. Enter the inside diameter of the cone at the 'To' end here. For a conical head, either the 'From' node or 'To' node will have a diameter equal to zero or two times the small end knuckle radius. Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical section.
Cone Length
Enter the design length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate the effective length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations. For a regular transition cone, the cone length will be equal to the element length. For the case of a conical head this will be the length of the sloped section while the element distance is the length of the straight flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-12
Element Data
Toriconical
Check this field if this cone has either a flare (at the small end) or a knuckle (at the large end). See ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an illustration of a toriconical section. By checking the field, the Cone Knuckle Data Edit window will appear.
Toricone Dialog
Additional Data for toriconical sections (Flare and Knuckle) The Toricone dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the knuckles, which are parts of a cone component. The following options are available: DELETE OK CANCEL HELP Resets the input fields to values of 0. Saves the data then closes the window. Exits the window without saving the data. Displays the button definitions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-13
Sump Head?
Like ellipsoidal and torispherical heads, spherical heads can also be sump heads. Check the box to indicate that this element is a sump head. When the pull down is active the program will list all available nozzles. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The best strategy is to completely define all of the elements and details and then create the sump element last.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-14
Element Data
Attachment Factor
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, or the British Standard PD:5500. For PD:5500, enter the factor C computed per figures 3.5.5(1-2). Typical values are 0.35 or 0.41. For ASME Code, refer to Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as follows: 0.17 0.20 0.20 0.13 0.20 0.33 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.75 0.33 (b-1) (b-2) (c) (d) (e f g) (h) (i) (j k) (m n o) (p) (q) (r s) Head welded to vessel with generous radius Head welded to vessel with small radius Lap welded or brazed construction Integral flat circular heads Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m) Plate welded to end of shell Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment) Plate held in place by screwed ring Bolted flat head with full face gasket Plate screwed into small diameter vessel Plate held in place by beveled edge
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-16
Element Data
Flange Analysis
Body Flange
PVElite calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the ASME Code, latest addenda. Click the Perform Flange Calculation check box to describe the input of a custom body flange or fill in the flange class and grade below. For a discussion of Flange input, design and analysis, refer to The Flange Module (see "FLANGES" on page 13-1).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-18
Element Data
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-19
Basering Dialog
The Basering dialog allows the input of basering data. Note: Use the Plot button to get a detailed sketch of the geometry you entered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-20
Element Data
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-21
Basering Analysis
The PVElite Basering module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calculations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques as described in, The Base Ring Module. This chapter also describes the theory and method of analysis as well as the input values.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-22
Element Data
The tailing lug calculation is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type design as depicted in the figure on the following page. The design is based on a lift position where no bending occurs on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design are the section modulus, shear and bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength. The location of the center of the pin hole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer most of the top ring or the basering, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/plate the height of the tailing lug is required. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the same material as the gusset or basering. Note that all input fields pertain to one tail lug. In order for the program to perform this analysis it must be instructed to perform the rigging analysis. To do this select the Input menu option, then select Design/Analysis Constraints and then click the Installation/Misc Options button. Then enter in the lug distances and impact factor. When this is complete, PVElite will compute the tailing lug force.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-23
Centerline Offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tailing lug.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4-24
Element Data
Discussion of Results
The tailing lug design consists of a three-part analysis: the basering assembly (basering, skirt and top ring), the strength of the weld the tailing lug itself It is assumed that there is no bending in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only the basering and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation. The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
Stress Type Shear at Pin Hole Bearing Stress Weld Stress Allowable Value 0.4 Sy 0.75 Sy 0.49 Sallow
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-2
Introduction
PVElite vessel models are composed of the basic elements (heads, shells, cones, etc.) with details added to these elements. Vessel details are included for two reasonsto develop the total vessel deadweight loads, and to collect information for the analysis of vessel components. Not all of these details are sensible additions to every element. The following table defines the application of these vessel details to the different elements. Cylinder Elliptical Head Tori Head Sph Head Flat Head Cone Body Flange Skirt
Ring Nozzle Lugs Weight Forces/Moments Platform2 Saddle3 Tray2 Legs5 Packing Liquid Insulation Lining
#1 # # # # # # Y/N Y/N4 Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
# # # # # # # # # # # # #
# Indicates that this element type may have several of these details defined Vertical vessels only Horizontal vessels only Y/N (Yes or No) indicates that this element may have this detail enabled or disabled Vertical vessels only and only if no skirt is defined
2 3
It is also useful to note here the positioning of certain vessel "details" are applied at a point, such as over a length of the element. A good example is insulation. For a bottom (or left) head, the insulation (element detail) actually starts before the "From" node and covers the head to the "To" node. For a 60-inch diameter elliptical bottom head, the start point of the insulation is 15 inches below the "From" node (enter -15 for the "Distance from From Node"). If the head has the standard 3-inch straight flange, then the insulation covers 18 inches of the element (enter 18 for the "Height/Length of the Insulation"). See the chapter on Details for more information.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-3
Insulation Details
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-4
Assigning Detail
Details may be assigned to elements by selecting them from the Detail toolbar located at the top of the vessel input screen. The first step in this process is to make the element of interest the current element by clicking on it. Next, click the appropriate detail icon for the detail you need to add. A dialog box will display. Enter all of the information then click OK and PVElite will update the graphic image showing your new detail. Since the image is scaled you can see if you placed your detail in the correct location.
Detail Toolbar
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-5
The individual detail windows generally have the following buttons available: Prev Next/Add Saves the current details data and displays the previous details data. If there is no previous detail, an error message will be displayed. Saves the current details data and displays the next detail of the same type for the element. If no additional detail of this type exists, the program will create a default detail for the user's modification. PVElite registers details by the Detail ID. If the current detail does not have a Detail ID defined, the program will display an error message if this button is used. Deletes the current detail and displays the data of the next detail of this type, if it exists. If there is not a next detail, the data of the previous detail, if it exists, will be displayed on the window. If no previous detail exists for the element, a new detail listing will be created. Saves the data of the current detail and closes the window. Note that the program will generate an error and not save the data if no Detail ID is specified. Closes the window without saving the current data.
Delete
OK Cancel
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-6
Ring Material
Launches the material database. Clicking on a material name from the program's database will close the material selection window and bring that material name into the detail data. As not all details require a material definition, not all detail edit windows contain this button. Displays general help for the detail window.
Help
Other buttons not shown in the illustration above: SECTIONID Displays the database names for the wide variety of cross section data stored in PVElite. As with MATERIAL..., clicking on a name in the database will close the database and copy the selected name to the Section ID field. This option is available for leg details. Appears with those details, which involve some length such as insulation, packing and liquid. These details require a start position and end position (entered as a distance from the From node and height/length of detail). If the detail extends throughout the element, clicking this button will automatically calculate and enter these values so that the detail "covers" 'the entire element. This feature is very useful for heads where these two terms (distance and height/length) may not be obvious. Remember that the From node and To node mark the ends of the straight flange portion of the head element and the head itself starts before or extends beyond this node pair. This leads to negative distances from the From node or a larger height/length of the detail. Allows some detail types such as insulation to be applied over the entire vessel at one time. Of course the detail type can be edited on an individual basis on any element if the ALL feature has been used.
FULL
ALL
Note that only the details of the current element are accessible. To review or define details on other elements, the element of interest must be made current by clicking on it first. Note: Users may also access the Detail Edit window directly from the graphic image found in the Build and Define modes. Click the left mouse button on the element to make it current and then click the right mouse button on the detail of interest. For details that cannot be right clicked such as liquid, click the detail on the detail toolbar and its associated edit dialog will display.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-7
From Node
The From Node is an element identifier that cannot be entered or modified. The From Node (and the highlighted element on the graphic) indicates the element which contains the detail.
For the Detail... Ring Nozzle Lug Weight Force/Moment Platform Saddle Trays Legs Packing Liquid Insulation Lining
Enter axial distance between From node and the following location: Centerline of the ring Centerline of the nozzle Centroid of the lug attachment weld Point at which the weight acts Point at which the force or moment acts Axial distance from the node to the bottom of the platform Vertical centerline of the saddle Bottom of the lowest tray Centroid of the leg attachment weld Start of the packed section Start of the liquid section Start of the insulated section Start of the lined section
Detail ID
Enter any alphanumeric string to identify the detail. While not required, it is suggested to assign unique names for unique items for clear reporting. For example, nozzles should be unique as their individual identification is important while insulation on all elements, if consistent throughout, may be named INSUL on each element. Some consistency will help your naming process. You may wish to use the From node number with an alphabetical extension showing the detail type and the number of such details if needed. For example, for a nozzle, insulation and ring defined on the element From node 20 To node 30 you may have Detail IDs of "NOZL A", "INSUL", and "20 RING 1 of 2", respectively. No two details should have the same name.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-8
Rings
The Stiffening Ring dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the rings, which are attached to the current element. These data are used in the calculation of the weight of the ring and, for external pressure checks, in the calculation of the ring area and inertia. When using the ASME Code, the Stiffening Ring dialog displays.
As the stiffening ring data is entered, PVElite automatically computes the inertias required and available, provided it is not a cone to cylinder junction ring. For bar rings, the program will size a new ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the value given in the Miscellaneous Options dialog located on the Design/Analysis dialog. The Section Calculator button allows inertia, area and centroidal distance to be computed for non-standard or built up sections. This button is only available when the Section Type ring is being analyzed. The Check Standards Bars button helps users select a suitable ring. As you cursor through the rings, the program computes the results and places them in the display area near the bottom of the dialog. Rings that meet Code requirements display in blue and failed rings display in red along with a failed message. Users should verify that the entire vessel is modeled prior to placing and sizing the rings. The Bar Selection dialog is shown below. Use the mouse, space bar, and/or arrow keys to navigate this tree.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-9
Thickness of Ring
Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring.
Ring Material
Enter a name of the ring material from the program's material database or select the material name by first clicking on the Ring Material button. Individual material parameters may be viewed and modified by pressing Enter when the cursor is in this field. PVElite allows entry of the generic entry of any type of stiffener. To do this you must know the cross sectional area of the stiffener as well as the moment of inertia and the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid. If you are using an American type structural shape simply click the Section Type button and then click the type of geometry being used. If a non-American type section ring is being used, enter in the properties for your section type.
Moment of Inertia
A property of the stiffener typically taken from a structural handbook. Units of inertia are length to the 4th power.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-12
Nozzle Analysis
PVElite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and optional reinforcing pad. The program also calculates the strength of failure paths for the nozzles. This calculation is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45. The calculation procedure is based on figure UG-37.1. The program calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on inside diameter for the following vessel components:
Component
Cylinder 2:1 Elliptical Head Torispherical Head Spherical Head or Shell
Paragraph
UG-27 (c) (1) UG-32 (d) (1) UG-32 (e) (1) UG-27 (d) (3)
Limitations
None None None None
Note: PVElite also analyzes a large nozzle in a welded flat head, which is found in this user manual where the flat head is discussed. The program evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles. NOZZLE takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition. NOZZLE also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT) calculations for nozzles. As the nozzle data is entered, PVElite will automatically perform the ASME area of replacement or PD:5500 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed every time the cursor is moved in between input cells. If there is any error in the input that will not allow the analysis to be performed, a status of failed will appear at the bottom of the Nozzle dialog. The calculation is initiated once the pipe size is specified. If you are changing data, such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells, press F5 to force PVElite to recalculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result will appear in red. A nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically the area and minimum nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program will display the text failed in brackets, even though the area of replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this feature, we suggest that the entire vessel be modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle pressure design options set. Also for vessels that have ANSI flanges note that the ANSI flange rating will be shown on the main Status bar. The figure below displays the Nozzle Module geometry.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-14
Alloy Steels: GR 1.5 GR 1.7 GR 1.9 GR 1.10 GR 1.13 GR 1.14 High Alloy Steels GR 3.1 GR 3.2 GR 3.4 GR 3.5 GR 3.6 GR 3.7 GR 3.8
C-1/2Mo 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo 2-1/4Cr-1Mo 5Cr-1/2Mo 9Cr-1Mo NI-FE-MO-CB NI Alloy 200 NI CU 400, 500 NI-CR-FE 600 NI CR-FE 800 NI-MO B2 Nickel Alloys
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-15
Note that if you are using Metric or non-English units, then the diameter when converted must end up as a value in the table above. For example if the size were 10 inch nominal, this would correspond to 254 mm. In the nozzle dialog, press the button next to the pipe size to select it from the list. In the list, both the ANSI nominal and Metric Nominal are shown.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-16
Note that all schedules of pipe may not have a corresponding diameter associated. In this case, PVElite will return an error stating the thickness of the nozzle was not found.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-17
Shell Tr Value
For some vessel designs the nozzle reinforcement is governed by bending and normal stresses in the local shell area where the nozzle is located. Normally the value of Tr (shell required thickness) is based on internal pressure requirements. Some specifications call out for "Full Replacement." If this is the case, enter in the actual shell thickness less the corrosion allowance. For another option, review the Nozzle Design Modification Section in the Design/Analysis Constraints. The Base Nozzle tr on Max. Stress ratio check box can also satisfy external loading criteria by computing the exact requirement for tr. If you enter the Shell Tr, this is the value the program will use. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 0. This directive is for vertical vessels only. This option should not be checked if the vessel is a horizontal vessel.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-18
Nozzle Orientation
The Alternative (more versatile) Method
This alternative method of orientating nozzles, especially in cylinders gives the user complete control over the direction in which the nozzle points. By using this method, the user is not confined to only having nozzles point in the coordinate system of the 3D model. By this, we mean that nozzles may only point in the X, Y and Z directions like this:
In the above figure, the hillside nozzles are only pointing in four directions, aligned with the major co-ordinates of the cylinder. The alternative method presented in this section shows how the nozzles can be placed to point in any hillside direction with greater ease.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-19
Using the Layout Button in the Nozzle Dialog Screen - Alternative Method
We discuss how a hillside nozzle may be made to point in any direction as indicated below:
The above figure shows that the direction of the nozzle is not controlled by the four axis directions of the cylinder, but may be made to point in any direction within the 360 position around the cylinder. Note the difference between the Reference Angle, and the Layout Angle.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-20
Nozzle In a Cylinder
Radial and Hillside Nozzles in Cylinders If the nozzle is to be installed in a cylinder, the following opens :
Three different orientations are available for the nozzle: Radial Nozzle Hillside Nozzle Lateral Nozzle These orientations are controlled by clicking the appropriate radio button:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-21
Enter the reference angle alpha. As this is a radial nozzle, the centerline of the nozzle passes through the centerline of the parent cylindrical shell. Projection Dimension "Proj"
Enter the projection from the centerline of the parent cylinder to the end of the nozzle as illustrated on the screen. Once this is entered, PVElite automatically calculates the projection ho, and this value replaces the red message Please enter a valid "Proj" value to compute ho with the computed value of ho. Return to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the layout angle and projection. Hillside Nozzle Cylinder - Data Entry
Reference Angle Alpha Enter the reference angle. Note, the reference angle is not the layout angle. The reference angle displays in the figure on th next page.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-22
Nozzle Offset Dimension Enter the Offset Dimension. To clarify matters, the figure below displays the offset dimension.
Enter the projection from the centerline of the parent cylinder to the end of the nozzle as illustrated on the screen. Once this is entered, PVElite automatically calculates the projection ho, and this value replaces the red message Please enter a valid "Proj" value to compute ho with the computed value of ho. On returning to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the layout angle and projection. To clarify matters, the figure below displays the layout angle the program calculates:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-23
Reference Angle Alpha Enter the reference angle alpha. This is the angle between the nozzle centerline and the parent cylinder centerline. It is illustrated on the input screen. Note: You have to return to the main Nozzle dialog to enter the projection from the surface of the cylinder.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-24
The available nozzle orientations are: Radial Nozzle Hillside Nozzle These orientations are controlled by clicking the appropriate radio button:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-25
Reference Angle Alpha - The Direct Method Enter the reference angle alpha as indicated in the following illustration:
Using this method to derive the reference angle, PVElite will compute the reference angle alpha from the coordinate X-Y location chosen by the user. This method is useful, as nozzle locations on heads are often given in the X-Y coordinate system. Enter the appropriate values of X and Y in any of the four angle quadrants.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-26
Enter the projection from the centerline of the parent cylinder to the end of the nozzle as illustrated on the screen. Once this is entered, PVElite automatically calculates the projection ho, and this value replaces the red message Please enter a valid "Proj" value to compute ho with the computed value of ho. On returning to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the layout angle and projection. Hillside Nozzle in Head - Data Entry For more information, refer to Radial Nozzle in Head in the previous section for entry of this data. Notes and Advantages for Hillside Nozzles Often, hillside nozzles in heads are arranged such that the flange faces are all level in the same plane, as in the illustration below:
Using the alternate method of entry for hillside nozzles in a head makes this arrangement very simple.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-27
Pad Width
In many cases the desired pad width is known and the diameter is not known. When the pad width is entered, the program will compute the Pad outer diameter and update the screen accordingly. Internally PVElite works with the pad diameter and not the width.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into account for the pad thickness.
Pad Material
Enter the applicable code material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the Material Database by clicking the Pad Material button. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-28
Flange Type
This is the type of nozzle flange. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out for documentation purposes.
Flange Material
This is the material the flange is constructed of. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out for documentation purposes. The flange material should correspond to the type listed for the flange grade.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-29
Lugs
The Lug Dialog allows the entry of the sets of support lugs, which are attached to the current element. If no skirt or legs are defined for a vertical vessel, the lowest set of lugs will be used as the vessel support point for dead load and live load calculations.
PVElite allows the entry of one of three types of support lug geometries: 1 - simple geometry with gussets 2 - gusseted geometry with top plate 3 - gusseted geometry with continuous top ring Depending on the type of geometry selected, additional data will need to be entered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-30
Height of Gussets
Enter the height of one gusset.
Thickness of Gussets
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-31
Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.
Pad Width
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad width must be greater than the attachment width. The length of the attachment is measured along the axis of the vessel. If the box is checked to perform the analysis and the pad properties are filled in, the program will compute the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness o of the pad. Any allowances for the external corrosion should be taken in to account for the pad thickness.
Pad Length
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, though these two values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-32
Weights
The Weight Dialog allows the entry of miscellaneous weight that cannot be entered by using any of the other methods. Note that this is not an applied force, but a static mass that will affect the natural frequency of the vessel and axial stress calculations. Piping can be modeled using the Weight Dialog. The area and mass of the piping will be considered in the same manner as a weight.
Miscellaneous Weight
Enter a weight value. This could be generated by an attached piece of equipment such as a motor, by internals such as piping, or by externals such as structural elements. Note that this value will affect the seismic analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-33
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction
Enter the force in the selected direction. Note that the Y direction is always vertically up, the X direction is from left to right, and the Z direction is out of the page. Loads perpendicular to the vessel will be resolved into a single vector and applied to create the worst combination with the live load. Unlike miscellaneous weight, this force is not included in the seismic analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-34
Platforms
The Platform Dialog allows the user to input and edit data of the platforms, which are attached to the current vertical vessel element.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-35
Platform Weight
Enter the weight of the platform if you wish to override the program's computed weight value.
Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. The platform width, grating weight and railing weight are used to compute the weight of the platform automatically when entering data on the dialog.
Platform Height
The platform height is the distance from the floor plate to the top handrail. This dimension is usually 42 inches. The program uses this value to compute the wind area when one of the Wind area calculation buttons is clicked.
Platform Clearance
The platform clearance is distance between the outer shell surface and the inner diameter of the platform. The value is used to compute the floor area of the platform.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-36 The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative). One half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient. The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by 3.
The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by 3. Note that this option will yield the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep angle of greater than 180 degrees. To have the program compute the area, simply fill in the required data such as the platform height, width, start and end angles and the force coefficient. As you enter the data the program will compute the result and insert it into the wind area cell. If you want to use your own values, type it in and do not press one of the area options. Note: This option is not available on the Platform dialog, but is globally available in the Installation / Miscellaneous Options dialog.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-37
Saddles
The Saddle Dialog lets the user input and edit data of the saddles, which are attached to the current horizontal cylinder. The size and location of the saddles are important for the Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports. For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined and they do not have to be symmetrically placed about the center of the vessel axis. If no saddles are defined for a horizontal vessel, the dead load and live load calculations will not be performed.
Width of Saddle
Enter the width of the saddle support. This width does not include any wear pad on the vessel side.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-38
Saddle Dimension A
This distance is the length between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line of the nearest head. This dimension is usually labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
E for Plates
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the material used to make the saddles.
Baseplate Length
This is the long dimension of the baseplate, which is in contact with the supporting surface. This value is comparable with the vessel diameter.
Baseplate Width
This is the short dimension (Width) of the baseplate.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-39
Baseplate Thickness
This is the thickness of the baseplate support.
Number of Ribs
The ribs run parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Enter the number of ribs on one saddle support.
Rib Thickness
Enter the thickness of the rib supports.
Web Thickness
The web is the part of the support structure to which the ribs are attached. Enter the thickness of the web here.
Web Location
There are 2 possible locations for the webs, center or side. Pull down the appropriate selection.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-40
Trays
The Tray Dialog allows the user to enter and edit one set of equally spaced trays with a set liquid height for the current element. The Distance from "From" Node will be to the bottom of the lowest tray. Trays may only be entered for vertical vessels.
Number of Trays
Enter the number of trays for the current element.
Tray Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between trays.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-41
Legs
The Leg Dialog allows the user to input data for the legs that are attached to the current element. Legs may be entered for vertical vessels that have no skirt element.
Leg Orientation
Select the orientation of the leg to the centerline. Weak, Strong and diagonal are acceptable selections.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-42
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs. This value should be greater than or equal to 3.
Section Identifier
Enter the section identifier for the vessel. The program has several databases of structural shapes. The Section ID database may be displayed by clicking the Section ID button or press [Alt-S] keystroke combination. The section identifier can be selected directly from the database.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the attachment point of the leg to the base.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-43
Packing
The Packing Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data for the packing, which is attached to the current element.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-44
Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Size (in.)
Density (lb/ft3)
Size (in.)
Density (lb/ft3)
Ceramic Raschig Ring 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3 4 60.0 61.0 55.0 56.0 50.0 42.0 46.0 46.0 41.0 37.0 36.0
Carbon Raschig Ring 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3 46.0 27.0 34.0 27.0 31.0 34.0 27.0 23.0
Carbon Steel Pall Ring 5/8 1 1 1/2 2 37.0 30.0 26.0 24.0
Carbon Steel Raschig Ring 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 133.0 94.0 75.0 62.0 52.0 39.0 42.0 37.0 25.0
Plastic Pall Ring 5/8 1 1 1/2 2 3 7.25 5.50 4.75 4.50 4.50
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-45
Liquid
The Liquid Dialog allows entry and editing of liquid data in the model.
Height/Length of Liquid
Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the liquid section will be taken at half this height. This value is also used to calculate the operating pressure at all points below the liquid.
Liquid Density
Enter the density of the liquid. Some typical specific gravities and densities are shown below in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you use another units system.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-46
Name
Ethane Propane N-butane Iso-butane N-Pentane Iso-Pentane N-hexane 2-methypentane 3-methylpentane 2,2-dimethylbutane 2,3-dimethylbutane N-heptane 2-methylheptane 3-methylheptane 2,2-dimethylpentane 2,4-dimethylpentane 1,1-dimethylcyclopentane N-octane Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Alcohol Ammonia Benzine Gasoline Kerosene Mineral oil Petroleum oil
Gravity
0.3564 0.5077 0.5844 0.5631 0.6247 0.6247 0.6640 0.6579 0.6689 0.6540 0.6664 0.6882 0.6830 0.6917 0.6782 0.6773 0.7592 0.7068 0.7504 0.7536 0.7834 0.7740 0.8844 0.8718 0.7900 0.8900 0.6900 0.7000 0.8000 0.9200 0.8200
Density (lb/ft3)
22.23 31.66 36.44 35.11 38.96 38.96 41.41 41.03 41.71 40.78 41.56 42.92 42.59 43.13 42.29 42.24 47.34 44.08 46.79 46.99 48.85 48.27 55.15 54.37 49.26 55.50 43.03 43.65 49.89 57.37 51.14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-47
Insulation
The Insulation Edit Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data of the insulation, which is attached to the current element.
Insulation Density
Enter the insulation density. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-48
Name Calcium Silicate Foam Glass Mineral Wool Glass Fiber Asbestos Careytemp Kaylo 10 Perlite/Celo-temp 1500 Polyurethane Styrofoam
Density 22.5 16.0 14.0 11.0 30.0 18.0 22.0 23.0 4.0 3.0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-49
Lining
The Lining Edit Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data of the lining, which is attached to the current element.
Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined section will be taken at half this height. Note that if you have lining in a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the length of the lined section.
Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing. Note that the only distinction between insulation and lining, from the program's point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Name
Alumina Brick Fire Clay High Alumina Kaolin Magnesite Silica Concrete Cement
Density (lbs/ft3)
170.0 130.0 130.0 135.0 180.0 110.0 140.0 100.0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-50
Click
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-51
Length along Shell of Jacket section Enter the Length along the shell as illustrated above. Pitch Spacing Enter the pitch between the centers of adjacent half-pipes. Jacket Design Temperature Enter the Design Temperature of the half-pipe jacket (this is not necessarily the design temperature of the parent shell).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-52 Jacket Design Pressure Enter the Design Pressure of the fluid inside the half-pipe jacket. Jacket Material Clicking enables users to select the desired material from the drop down list.
Jacket Corrosion Allowance Enter the internal corrosion allowance of the half-pipe jacket.
Nominal Pipe Diameter (in) Select the nominal diameter of the pipe.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5-53
Pipe Schedule Select the pipe schedule number Deduct Mill Tolerance from Thickness? If the mill undertolerance (usually 12-1/2% on pipe thickness), then check this box. PVElite will then reduce the thickness by the mill undertolerance. For Users Preferring to Enter the Pipe Dimensions follow these instructions: Jacket Thickness Enter the actual half-pipe wall thickness.
This is an alternative drop down list box where users can select a standard pipe from the PVElite internal pipe database. Contents Specific Gravity Enter the specific gravity (SG) of the fluid inside the half-pipe jacket. This value is used when PVElite computes the vessel weights. Calculator Enables users to see the half-pipe analysis computation without having to analyze the whole vessel. A mini-screen displays containing the calculation results, thus allowing the user to see where problems with the design may exist.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-2
Introduction
The information on the Design Constraint tab allows entry of global design data that the program will use as defaults before the model is created. Depending on the design code, the information gathered may differ slightly examples could include the hydrotest type, construction type and degree of radiography.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-3
Design Data
Following is a discussion of the design data parameters that are used for overall vessel analysis:
Hydrotest Type
The Internal Pressure Calculations report from PVElite will list hydrotest pressures for all three test types described below. It is important to properly identify the information requested throughout this input group. That is, even though Hydrotest Test Position, Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and Flange Distance to Top are not used for ASME UG-99(b) or for ASME UG-99(b) footnote 33, these data are necessary to report the proper hydrostatic test pressure for ASME UG-99(c). Select the hydrotest type. The analysis program provides three different ways to determine hydrotest pressure:
1 - ASME UG-99(b)
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure for the vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the stress value S for the design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-carbon steel vessels where the allowable stress changes with temperature
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-4
starting even at a somewhat low temperature. If Appendix body flanges have been specified, the bolt allowable stresses are included in determining Sa/S.
2 - ASME UG-99(c)
The hydrotest pressure will be determined by multiplying the minimum MAP by 1.3 and reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element or flange. If the vessel is tested in the horizontal position, the hydrostatic head will be based on the maximum shell diameter plus the Projection from Top plus the Projection from Bottom specified later in this input group. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a vessel element sets the minimum MAP, then the hydrostatic head is set by the distance of that element from the top of the vessel plus the Projection from Top. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a flange has the minimum MAP, the hydrostatic head is composed of the Flange Distance to Top plus the Projection from Top.
Hydrotest Position
This input is required so that the total static head can be determined and subtracted in accordance with UG-99(c). This field is used in conjunction with the Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and Flange Distance to Top fields to determine the total static head. Select one of the following Hydrotest Positions.
Hydrotest Position
Vertical Horizontal
Description
The vessel would be tested in the upright or vertical position. Note that not very many vessels are tested in the vertical position. This is the position for the majority of vessels tested. The vessel would normally be on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal position (for a horizontal vessel).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-5
Construction Type
Select the type of construction to be included on the nameplate. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of construction display below: Type
Welded Pressure Welded Brazed Resistance Welded
Description
Welded Pressure Welded Brazed Resistance Welded
Special Service
Select the type of special service in which the vessel will be used. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of special service display below:
Field Name
None Lethal Unfired Steam Direct Firing Non-stationary
Description
None Lethal Service Unfired Steam Boiler Direct Firing Non-stationary Pressure Vessel
Degree of Radiography
Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Options include:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-6
ASME VIII-1
RT-1 RT-2 RT-3 RT-4
Description
When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-11(a) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not been applied. When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been applied. When the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(b). When only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or when none of the other requirements are applied.
Miscellaneous Weight
Many designers like to include extra weight to account for vessel attachments and internals not otherwise included in the models. The total weight of the vessel is multiplied by 1.0 plus this percent (i.e., 1.03, 1.05). The two most common choices are 3.0 or 5.0.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-7
Corroded Hydrotest?
By default PVElite uses the uncorroded wall thickness when the stresses on the elements during the hydrotest are computed. In some cases it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel after it has corroded. If you wish to use a corroded thickness in the calculations, check this box. Please note that longitudinal stresses due to Hydrostatic test pressure will also be computed in a similar manner.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-8
Installation Options
The installation options shown below allow the specification of where the equipment such as platforms, insulation, lining, etc. will be installed. This information is used to calculate the center of gravity of the vessel in both the shop and the field (operating) positions. Additionally, when computing such items as the fabricated weight, operating weight, empty weight, etc., PVElite will consider these detail weights as appropriate for the various weight cases.
Stiffener Type
For ASME VIII-1 and VIII-2 the program has the ability to determine the maximum stiffener spacing and add rings to the model. If you have selected this position to model, it can select an appropriate stiffener from the AISC or selected database. If you have a non-AISC database selected, be sure the selected Stiffener type exists in the database. The stiffener types are: Equal Angle Unequal Angle (hard way shown) Double Angles with large or small sides back to back Channels Wide Flanges Structural Tees Bar For the bar ring design, the program will design a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00. The height of the ring is 10 times its thickness. The minimum ring width the program will start out with is 0.5 inches or 12mm.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-9
Rigging Data
The rigging analysis calculates and locates the bending and shear stresses created during erection process. Where the vessel is lifted from the horizontal position at two lifting points up to the vertical position where the vessel is set onto the foundation. The safety of the maximum combined stresses is also analyzed using the unity check method. This analysis however, does not evaluate the design of any rigging attachment such as, lugs, shackles, cables etc Rigging analysis is performed when the vessel is in the horizontal position where the combinations of stresses are at its maximum. The torsional effect is not considered in this analysis. The vessel is erected using two lifting points where the tail and lifting lugs are located. The design weight of the vessel is calculated by multiplying the erected empty weight, including internals and externals, with an impact factor to simulate the initial lift. The rigging analysis reports the field and design weight of the vessel, the center of gravity, the reaction forces at the lifting points, the location for the maximum bending and shear stresses, and the unity check. As a comparison, the allowable bending (per UG-23) and shear (0.4 Sy @ ambient) stresses are also reported, and can be plotted with the fore-mentioned parameters. The stresses are calculated in 1-foot increments along the vessel taking into account the varying diameter and thickness of the shell. A circular cross sectional shape is assumed throughout the vessel sections with no corrosion allowance included for the thicknesses. Node numbering starts at the base of the vessel and ends at the top section of the vessel where the straight line ended. For elliptical heads, the end node is the end of the straight-line portion. Thus the total height of the vessel is the elevation of the last node.
Impact Factor
PVElite can perform a rigging (combined shear plus bending stress) analysis granted that the vessel has a support such as a skirt and the impact factor and lug elevations defined. When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high as 3.0 may be entered in. The impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the vessel by the impact factor. If you do not wish to perform the rigging analysis, set the impact factor to 0.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-11
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
If the user toggles on this button and the required element thickness for internal pressure exceeds the user's finished thickness for the element, the program will increase the user's finished thickness to meet or exceed the thickness required for internal pressure. PVElite will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is activated in the program configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the next 1/8 inch in English units or to the next millimeter in metric units). The program will perform this calculation automatically as the model data is being typed in. Check this box before any part of the vessel has been modeled. If the given thickness is greater than the required thickness, then the program will not alter the given value. Note that during the input phase, the program cannot check the required thickness for flanges. That check will be performed during the analysis phase.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-12
Load Case
The program performs calculations for various combinations of internal pressure, external pressure, hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic load. You can define up to twelve combinations of these loadings for the program to evaluate. Load cases are defined by a string that shows the loads to be added, i.e. "IP+OW+WI", which would be the sum of internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. Typical definitions for the load cases are shown below, followed by the definition of the load case abbreviations:
If you checked the box to perform vortex shedding calculations, the following load case descriptors may be used:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-13
The live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for two conditions - operating and hydrotest. In both cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads are usually a fraction of the operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are entered in the live load definitions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-14
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Design Pressure + Static Liquid Pressure
Computes the exact internal pressure at the nozzle location. Normally, this option would be used for re-rating vessels. This would allow one to get the exact results for each nozzle, because the overall pressure on each nozzle is computed on an individual basis.
Nozzle Design Modifications, MAWP + Static Liquid Pressure to the bottom of the Element that is governing the MAWP
Computes one single design internal pressure for all of the nozzles located on the vessel. If the nozzle location on a vessel changes due to a client request, there would be no need to rerun nozzle calculations since the pressure used in the calculations would not change. This design option is ideal for designing new vessels.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-15
tall tower, longitudinal stresses will govern. In this case the shell required thickness must be based on longitudinal stresses and not the hoop stress. If you check this option, PVElite will look at all of the defined load cases and select the highest stress ratio. It will then use this number as a multiplier on the shell thickness. Thus the nozzle design is based on the precise loading at the bottom of that shell course. Note: Optionally, for full replacement options, you can type in your own value of tr for each nozzle. That value will override this directive.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-16
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-17
Wind Data
Wind Design Code
Select one wind of the design codes:
ASCE UBC NBC User Defined Wind Profile. ASCE-1995/98 Mexico 1993 BS-6399 1997 AS/NZ Euro Code IS-875 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) The program implements ASCE 793. Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition. National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition. Instead of supplying the wind parameters required by the above codes, the user may specify the elevation vs. wind pressure directly. The American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 1995/1998. This revision includes a new calculation for the gust factor as well as the wind pressure at height Z. These calculations are based on a 3 second gust. Mexico's National Wind Code Standard Wind Code of Britain, replaces CP3 Design Wind Code of Australia and New Zealand, 2002 edition This is the Design Wind Code for several European Countries including France. This is India's National Standard Wind design code. The year of this code is 1987.
The remaining wind load data required by PVElite changes based on which Wind Design Code is selected. These data requirements are reviewed here according to the design code specification.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-18
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Exposure Factor:
Entry
1 2 3 4
Definition
Exposure A, Large city centers Exposure B, Urban and suburban areas Exposure C, Open terrain Exposure D, Flat unobstructed coastal areas
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-19
Category
I II III IV
Category
I II III IV
Classification
Buildings and structures not listed below Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area. Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc. Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure.
Entry
1 2 3
Definition
Round, moderately smooth Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02) Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Where: D' is the depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers and D is the diameter or least horizontal dimension. Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc. instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter. The value Cf will vary between 0.5 and 1.2 depending on the type of surface and height to diameter ratio.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-20
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the UBC Exposure Factor as defined in Section 2312:
Entry
2 3 4
Definition
Exposure B, Terrain with buildings, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site. Exposure C, Terrain, which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from the site in any full quadrant. Exposure D, The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 m.p.h. or more. Terrain, which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile or 10 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-21
Entry
1.15 1.15 1.0 1.0
Definition
Category I: Essential facilities Category II: Hazardous facilities Category III: Special occupancy structures Category IV: Standard occupancy structures
Most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0. The four Occupancy Categories (I-IV) are defined in Table 23-K of the code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-22
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Exposure Factor: Entry
1 2 3
Definition
Exposure A, open or standard exposure Exposure B, urban and suburban areas Exposure C, centers of large cities
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Definition
For tall towers ( L/D > 7 ) For moderately tall towers For short towers ( L/D < 1) or horizontal
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-23
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Roughness Factor as found in Figure B-15. Entry
1 2 3
Definition
Round, moderately smooth surface Round, rough surface (rounded ribs, h = 2%d) Round, very rough surface (sharp ribs, h = 8%d)
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc. instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-24
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE Exposure Factor:
Entry
1 2 3 4
Definition
Exposure A, large city centers Exposure B, urban and suburban areas Exposure C, open terrain Exposure D, flat unobstructed coastal areas
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Importance Factor
This value varies between .087 and 1.15 and is found in Table 6-2 of ASCE 95.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-25
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the Roughness Factor as found in Table 6-7: Entry
1 2 3
Definition
Round, moderately smooth surface Round, rough surface Round, very rough surface
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc. instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
Crest Distance
This is the distance upwind of the crest where the difference in ground elevation is half the hill or escarpment height.
Type of Hill
None 2-D ridge 2-D escarpment 3-D axisymmetric hill
Damping Factor
Enter the structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping). The damping factor is used in the calculation of the gust response factor. Additionally, if you wish to run another case empty or filled (or both), specify the values of the damping factor (beta) for these cases. By entering these values PVElite will compute the gust response factor for each case and the subsequent wind loads. The results will be displayed in the Wind Load Calculation and Wind Shear and Bending reports.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-26
Technical Note: Computation of h/d from table 6-7. For vessels that have a constant diameter the value of h/d is straightforward. The ratio is merely the total height of the vessel divided by the insulated outside diameter. This computation is more difficult for vessels of more than 1 diameter (i.e.: vessels that have cones). The first step is to compute the total height h. Next the total cross sectional area of the vessel is computed. To get a properly weighted value for h/d we square the maximum height and divide by the total area. Finally to get Cf we index into the table as needed and interpolate for the final value. If you have a shape factor specified and do not wish to use the computed value, specify your own shape factor in the Tools, Configuration option from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-27
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Risk Factor
This is the value of K1 and it varies between 1.05 and 1.08 depending on which zone has been entered above.
Terrain Category
The terrain category varies between 1 and 4.
Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions including open sea coasts and treeless plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights between 1.5 to 10 meters. This category is generally used for design purposes.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-28
Category 3
This is terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions, which have buildings up to 10 M in height. This includes well-wooded areas, towns and industrial areas fully or partially developed.
Category 4
Terrain consisting of large closely spaced obstructions. This category includes large urban centers and well developed industrial centers.
Equipment Class
This field accepts a value of 1, 2, or 3. Class A - 1 Class B - 2 Class C - 3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-29
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-30
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-31
Cat.
Descripcin
Terreno abierto, prcticamente piano y sin obstrucciones
Ejemplos
Franjas costeras planas, zonas de pentanos, Campos areos, pastizales y tierras de cultivo sin setos o bardas alrededor. Superficies nevadas planas Campos de cultivo o gran jas con pocas obstrucciones tales como setos o bardas alrededor, rboles y construcciones dispersas reas urbanas, suburbanas y de bosques, o cualquier terreno con numerosas obstrucciones estrechamente espaciadas. El tamao de las construcciones corresponde al de las casas y viviendas. Centros de grandes ciudades y complejos industriales bien desarrollados.
Limitaciones
La longitud mnima de este tipo de terreno en la direccin del viento debe ser de 2000 m 0 10 veces la altura de las construccin por disear, la que sea mayor. Las obstrucciones tienen Alturas de 1.5 a 10 m, en una longitud mnima d 1500 m.
Las obstrucciones presentan Alturas de 3 a 5 m. La longitud mnima de este tipo de terreno en la direccin del viento debe ser de 500 m o 10 veces la altura de la construccin, la que sea mayor. Por lo menos el 50% de los edificios tiene una altura mayor que 20 m. Las obstrucciones miden de 10 a 30 m de altura. La longitud mnima de este tipo de terreno en la direccin del viento debe se la mayor entre 400 m y 10 veces la altura de la construccin.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-32
FC
1.0 0.95 0.90
Categora de terreno
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-33
1 2 3 4
hi - es la altura, media a partir del nivel del terreno de desplante, por encima de la cual la variacin de la velocidad del viento no es importante y se puede suponer constante; a esta altura se le conoce como altura gradiente; h y Z estn dadas en metros, y giel exponente que determina la forma del la variacin de la velocidad del viento con la altura y es adimensional. g - Los coeficientes g j h estn en funcin de la rugosidad terreno (tabla I.1) [see above please]. En la tabla I.4 se consignan los valores que se aconsejan para estos coeficientes. En la figura III.1 del tomo de Ayudas de diseo se muestra la variacin del factor Fg con la altura, con la categora del terreno y con la clase de estructura.
Topografa
Base de promontorios y faldas de serranas del lado de sotavento.
FT
0.8
1.1
1.2
Expertos en la material debern justificar y validar ampliamente los resultados de cualquiera de estos procedimientos.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-34
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-35
COEFICIENTE DE ARRASTRE Ca
Seccin transversal Tipo de superficie Relacin H/b 1 Lisa o poco rugosa (d/b k 0.0) Circular (bVd l 6 m2/s) Rugosa Muy rugosa Circular (bVd < 6 m2/s) Hexagonal u octagonal Cuadrada (viento normal a una cara) Cuadrada (viento sobre una esquina) Cualquiera Cualquiera Cualquiera Cualquiera (d/b k 0.02) (d/b k 0.08) 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.0 7 0.6 0.8 1.0 0.8 1.2 1.4 1.1 25 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.2 1.4 2.0 1.5 R40 0.7 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.4 2.2 1.6
b es el dimetro o la dimensin horizontal de la estructura, incluyendo la rugosidad de lo pared; para determinar el producto bVD, este dimetro ser el que se localiza a dos tercios de la altura total, a partir del nivel del terreno, en m. d es la dimensin que sobresale de las rugosidades, tales como costillas o spoilers, en m. VD es la velocidad del viento de diseo (inciso 4.8), convertida a m/s, y valuada para los dos tercios de la altura total. Para valores intermedios de H/b y d/b se permite la interpolacin lineal.
2 3 4
1
1.224 -.032 245
2
1.288 -.054 315
3
1.369 -.096 390
4
1.457 -0.151 455
Las variables o p h, adimensionales, dependen de la rugosidad del sitio de desplante, y h es la altura gradiente en m. Estas variables se definen en la tabla I.29. Las variables kr q
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-36
kr es un factor relacionado con la rugosidad del terreno: Para terrenos con gatera Para terrenos con gatera Para terrenos con gatera Para terrenos con gatera 5 1 = 0.06, 2 = 0.10, 3 = 0.06, y 4 = 0.06
Para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero = 0.01, y para aquellas formadas por marcos de concreto = 0.02.
VALORES DE R kR
Categora de terreno
1 2 3 4
a'
0.13 0.18 0.245 0.31
kR
0.06 0.08 0.10 0.14
VALORES DE \
Nota:
Para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero Para aquellas formadas por marcos de concreto
\
0.01 0.02
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-37
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value plus the Site Elevation is used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above mean sea level.
Vessel Location
Enter the location where the vessel is installed. Table 4 of BS-6399 factors modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by PVElite internally.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-38
Kb
8 4 2 1 0.5
Of course designing towers over 75 meters in height is not likely, and many other things would need to be considered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-39
Building Type
Welded Steel unclad frames Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office buildings of open plan or with partitioning) Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional masonry subdivision walls (e.g. apartment buildings), building of masonry construction and timber-framed housing
Q
0.632 0.227 0.02 0.0083
Explanation
NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual maximum value. (Sp = 0.749) NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp = Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845) NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000) NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048) NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. Back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4)) NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval of 10000 (yes that is ten thousand) years. (Sp = 1.263)
0.00574
0.001
Seasonal Factor - Ss
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: ' ..For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss..' PVElite uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is not recommended, or should only be used with a solid researched.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-40
Directional Factor - Sd
This value is taken from Table 3 of BS-6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about its central axis, the default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be reduced other than for exceptional circumstances. For more information consult Table 3. The values in that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-41
Seismic Data
Seismic Design Code
Select the design code to use for seismic calculations: ASCE-88 ASCE-93 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released in 1988. American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released in 1993. The new ASCE 7 earthquake standards released in 1993 are significantly more involved than the previous standards, and are also more strictly limited to buildings, and thus not as easily applied to vessels. Temporarily the program does not implement the complete dynamic analysis according to this standard. However the program does address the computation of the element mass multiplier as outlined on page 62 of the standard. In effect, the factors Av, Cc, P, and ac are multiplied together and then by the weight of the element to obtain the lateral force on the element. The program then computes the moments on the tower based on these results. One should have a good understanding of this code before using it. Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition. National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition. India's seismic design code based on the response spectrum method. India's seismic design code based on the seismic coefficient method. American Society of Civil Engineers 1995 edition. The methodology of this calculation is very similar to other earthquake codes. Essentially the base shear is computed based on paragraph 9.2.3.4 and the paragraphs, which precede it. The base shear is then distributed to the elements according to the equation 9.2.3.4-2 on page 70 of the standard. Uniform Building Code. The 1997 version of this code is implemented. Acceleration of the vessel based on a fraction of gravity. American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released in 1998. International Building Code released in 2000. Seismic Design per Mexico's Manual De Diseno Por Sismo The response spectrum analysis allows the use of modal time history analysis. The general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the ASCE 7-98 or IBC 2000 Codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program, such as the 1940 Earthquake El Centro and various spectra from the United States National Regulatory Commission Guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is user- defined, the table of points that define the response spectra must be entered in the table, in the appropriate units. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using the conventional Building Code techniques.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-42
Entry
1.00 1.25 1.50 0.00
Definition
Category I: Buildings not listed below Category II: High occupancy buildings Category III: Essential facilities Category IV: Low hazard buildings
Soil Type
Enter an integer indicating the Soil Profile Coefficient, S found in Table 24 of the standard. Soil Profiles are identified in Section 9.4.2 of the standard. Note that where soil properties are not known, soil profiles S2 or S3 shall be used, whichever produces the larger value of CS. (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the standard.) Entry
1 2 3
Definition
Soil Profile S1: Rock or stiff soil conditions (S Factor = 1.0) Soil Profile S2: Deep cohesion less deposits or stiff clay conditions (S Factor = 1.2) Soil Profile S3: Soft- to medium-stiff clays and sands (S Factor = 1.5)
Definition
Buildings with bearing walls Buildings with frame systems Elevated tanks Other structures
Note that the value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks supported by structural steel or legs.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-43
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See ASCE 7-88 Figures 14 & 15 to select the appropriate zone. Values for Seismic Coefficient, Z are found in Table 21 of the standard.
Zone
0 1 2 3 4
Definition
Zone 0: Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 1/8) Zone 1: Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 3/16) Zone 2: New England, Carolinas, Ozarks, valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest. (Z = 3/8) Zone 3: Sierras. (Z = 3/4) Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 1)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 4 indicates the greatest chance of an earthquake.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-44
Seismic Coefficient Cc
Enter Cc, the system seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical components from Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. For tanks, vessels and heat exchangers this value is normally taken as 2.0.
Entry
1.5 1.0 0.5
Definition
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III: Essential facilities required for post-earthquake recovery Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II: Buildings that have a substantial public hazard due to occupancy or use Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I: All other buildings
Amplification Factor ac
Enter ac, the attachment amplification factor determined in accordance with ASCE 7-93 Table 9.8-3. Values for this entry may be 1.0 or 2.0 depending on the relationship between the fundamental period of the vessel and the fundamental period of its supporting structure.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-45
Entry
1.25 1.25 1.00 1.00
Definition
Category I: Essential facilities Category II: Hazardous facilities Category III: Special occupancy structures Category IV: Standard occupancy structures
Soil Type
Select the soil type (S1 to S4) defined in Table 23-J of the code. Note that where soil properties are not known, soil profile S3 shall be used. Soil
1 2 3 4
Definition
Soil Profile S1:Rock (S Factor = 1.0) Soil Profile S2:Dense or stiff soil (S Factor = 1.2) Soil Profile S3:Not more than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 1.5) Soil Profile S4:More than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 12.0)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-46
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I. Zone
0 1 2 3 4 5
Definition
Zone 0:Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 0.00) Zone 1:Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 0.075) Zone 2a:New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks. (Z = 0.15) Zone 2b:Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest (Z = 0.20) Zone 3:Sierras. (Z = 0.30) Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 0.40)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 5 indicates the greatest chance of an earthquake.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-47
Entry
1.5 1.3 1.0
Definition
Post-disaster buildings Schools All other buildings
Soil Type
Select the soil factor (From Table 4.1.9C) for the site:
Soil
1 2 3 4
Definition
Category 1:From rock to stiff fine-grained soils up to 15 m deep Category 2:From compact coarse-grained soils to soft fine-grained soils up to 15 m deep Category 3:Very loose and loose coarse-grained soils with depth greater than 15 m Category 4:Very soft and soft fine-grained soils with depth greater than 15 m
Entry
1 2
Definition
Case 18 - Elevated tanks (such as equipment on legs). (R = 1.0) Case 6 - Ductile structures (such as towers on skirts). (R = 1.5)
Note
Elevated tank analysis also includes the special provisions of sentence 4.1.9.3 (3).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-48
Acceleration Zone
Select the acceleration-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC. Here are some examples of each zone: Entry
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Acceleration-Related Zone
Calgary, Alberta Toronto, Ontario Saint John, New Brunswick Varennes, Quebec Vancouver, British Columbia Duncan, British Columbia Port Hardy, British Columbia
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest chance of an earthquake.
Velocity Zone
Select the zone indicating the velocity-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC. Here are some examples of each zone:
Zone
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Velocity-Related Zone
Steinbach, Manitoba Calgary, Alberta Montreal, Quebec Quebec City, Quebec Dawson, Yukon Victoria, British Columbia Destruction Bay, Yukon
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest chance of an earthquake.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-49
Importance Factor
The importance factor is taken from table 4 in the IS-1893 standard. This value ranges from a maximum of 6.0 to 1.0. Factor
6.0 2.0 1.5 1.0
Description
A value typically used in nuclear applications. Dams of all types and lethal service applications Used in the design of important structures such as hospitals, tanks, water towers, and large assembly structures. All others
Soil Factor
The soil factor (Beta) is taken from Table 3 of the IS-1893 seismic design code. This value ranges between 1 and 1.5. Type I soils and hard rock should have a value of 1. Type II soils should also use a value of 1 except for well foundations or isolated RCC footings without tiebeams or un-reinforced strip foundations, which receive a value of 2.0. Type III soils can receive a value between 1.0 and 1.5.
Zone Number
The zone number ranges between 1 and 5 and depends on where the vessel will operate in India. You can determine the zone from a colored map of which is Figure 1 in IS 1893.
Period of Vibration
This field is optional. PVElite computes the natural frequency of the vessel and can thus compute the period of vibration. If this field is not 0 the program will use the entered value. This value is used in conjunction with Beta in order to determine Sa/g.
Damping Factor
This value which is used with the period of vibration to determine Sa/g. Values of damping in the IS 1893 standard are 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. The program will interpolate for intermediate values in between 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. Extreme values will be used if a damping factor is entered which is outside the range above.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-50
Importance Factor
ASCE-95 does not address an importance factor. However, this value is multiplied times the other values to compute the base shear. Thusly, this entry can be used as a scale factor for the base shear. If you do not wish to use this value simply enter a value of 1.0.
Force Factor ( R )
This value is taken from table 9.2.7.5. For vertical vessels, towers, stacks etc. this value is 2.0.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically, this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table. The help facility in PVElite contains the above referenced tables.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-51
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-52
Value
Essential facilities 1.25 Hazardous facilities 1.25 Special occupancy structures 1.0 Standard occupancy structures 1.0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-53
Gulf and prairies (Z=0.00) Rockies and Appalachian areas (Z=0.075) New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks (Z=0.15) Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest (Z=0.20) Sierras (Z=0.30) California fault areas (Z=0.40)
Note that Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates the greatest chance of an earthquake.
*R is defined as the numerical coefficient representative of the inherent overstrength and global ductility of lateral force resisting systems.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-54
Importance Factor
This is the occupancy importance factor as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The importance factor accounts for loss of life and property. This value typically ranges between 1.0 and 1.5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-55
Table9.4.1.2.4.A Values of Fa as a Function of Site Class and Mapped Short-Period Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration Site Class
A B C D E F
Ss<+0.25
0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.5 a
Ss=0.5
0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 a
Ss=0.75
0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 a
Ss=1.0
0.8 1.0 1.0 1.1 0.9 a
Ss>1.25b
0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 a
Table9.4.1.2.B (ASCE) 1615.2(2) (IBC), Values of Fv as a function of Site Class and Mapped 1-Second Period Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration Site Class
A B C D E F
Sl<+0.1
0.8 1.0 1.7 2.4 3.5 a
Sl=0.2
0.8 1.0 1.6 2.0 3.2 a
Sl=0.3
0.8 1.0 1.5 1.8 2.8 a
Sl=0.4
0.8 1.0 1.4 1.6 2.4 a
Sl>0.5b
0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 a a
Note: For intermediate values, the higher value of the straight line interpolation shall be used to determine the value of Ss or Sl.
a b
Site specific geo-technical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed.
Site specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-56
Response Spectrum
Selecting this method performs a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loading based upon the selected seismic Response Spectrum. Initially, the vessel is modeled as a 2-dimensional structure (note that for asymmetric leg arrangements, the horizontal direction of interest is taken as that corresponding to the weakest axis of the arrangement). Next an Eigensolution is performed on the vessel, which determines system mode shapes and modal natural frequencies (all modes with natural frequencies up through 100 Hz are calculated). The seismic response of each mode is then extracted from the Response Spectrum according to the natural frequency of each mode, and then adjusted according to the mode's "participation factor". The system response is then determined by combining all of the modal responses. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually, the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using conventional building Code techniques.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-57
User Defined
This option allows the user to enter a custom seismic response spectrum of type Frequency or Period vs. Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration (see instructions below). The same spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
El Centro
This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California earthquake, North-South component, 510% damping as described in Introduction to Structural Dynamics by John Biggs. This spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
ASCE
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the modal analysis procedure of ASCE Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is a built according to the ASCE-7 Section 9.4.1.2.6, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2S
IBC
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the modal analysis procedure of the International Building Code 2000 (which happen to mirror those of ASCE-7). The horizontal spectrum is built according to IBC-2000 Section 1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2 (as per IBC2000 Section 1617. 1).
1.60D.5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D2
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 2 % of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-58
1.60D7
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 7% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D10
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 10% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
Importance Factor
This is used for the ASCE and IBC options. For ASCE, this is the I, the occupancy importance factor determined from ASCE-7 Section 9.14. For IBC, this is the Ie, the occupancy importance factor in accordance with IBC 1616.2.
Combination Method
Modal responses must be combined in a way that most accurately captures the statistical correlation of the responses to each other. The available options are: SRSS: This method performs a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares combination of the modal results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be uncorrelated with, or totally unrelated to, each other. If the ASCE or IBC method has been chosen, modal combinations will automatically be performed using this method. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close frequencies, since those modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approximately the same time during the load profile.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-59
Group: This method performs a group combination method as described in the United States National Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.92 - responses of modes with natural frequencies within 10% of each other are combined using the Absolute Value method, while those sums are combined with each other and with m0ore far-flung modes, using the SRSS method. This simulates a response where the results of similar modes are assumed to be correlated, while those of all dissimilar modes are assumed to be uncorrelated. Absolute: This method performs an Absolute Value combination of the modal results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be correlated with each other. This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is usually overly-conservative, since modes with different natural frequencies will probably experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
Response Modification R:
This factor is required for ASDCE-7 and IBC, and is used to reduce the spectrum response. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6 Typical values are 1.25 through 8.0. For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6-60
Coefficient Cd:
This factor, the "deflection amplification factor", is used to scale up the calculated seismic displacements. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6. Typical values are 1.25 through 6.5.
Range Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with a range X-axis representing either Frequency or Period. In either case, the data points should be entered with ascending range values. Note: A zero entry for either Frequency or Period is invalid. Interpolation will be made linearly for intermediate range values. Data points defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking EDIT/REVIEW SPECTRUM POINTS.
Ordinate Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with an ordinate Y-axis representing Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration entered in units of Diameter, Diameter /second, of G's respectively. Interpolation will be made linearly for intermediate Ordinate values. Data points defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking EDIT/REVIEW SPECTRUM POINTS.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-2
PVElite Analysis
Introduction
Once all the data for the vessel model and analysis have been entered and corrected, the model is ready for analysis. The pull-down menu under Analyze shows two options: Analyze Error Check Only
Analyze Menu
Error Check Only will review all the data and produce an output report listing any errors that are found. These messages can be examined through the Output - Review option. If Analyze is selected, PVElite will also run through the error checker but then continue on (if no errors are found) through the complete analysis. The analysis program is the heart of the PVElite system. The analysis program uses all the data entered into the model to evaluate or design the pressure vessel. In any given analysis there will be between 16 and 20 analysis steps. As the program completes each calculation, important information from the step is displayed on the screen. The screen display at the completion of the internal pressure calculations, for example, lists both the given element thickness and the required thickness for each element in the vessel. The program waits for a user response before clearing the screen and moving on to the next analysis step. The user may respond by continuing on to the next step, continue non-stop through the remainder of all analysis steps, or quit the analysis. The results of the analysis are stored in two separate files on the hard disk. The text results of the job are held in a file with the extension .TAB (e.g. the jobname VES01 will have an input file named VES01.PVI and a text results file of VES01.TAB). The output processor replaces this .TAB file with a .T80 file (VES01.T80). The .T80 file contains a complete report for each analysis step for inspection and printing through the Review processor. The analysis also creates a .PVR file (e.g.. VES01.PVR); this file is used by the Output Review processor for component analysis. The program transfers to the Review processor at the completion of the analysis. PVElite not only analyzes vessels, it also designs vessel walls for pressures and loads. In addition to increasing the vessel wall thickness, the program can instead introduce stiffener rings to accommodate external pressures. The program directives for these design modifications are set in each job in the Design Data section of Global Data. In increasing the wall thickness to meet the required values, PVElite can either set the thickness to the exact requirement, or, round up to the next nominal value (1/16 inch in English units or 1 mm in metric units). This switch, too, is a setting in the Configuration option under Utility. If PVElite's design process changes any of the original input, the program will automatically erase the current output report and return to the beginning of the analysis and restart the run. All results will reflect the design changes, from the input echo to the added deadweight. The user's original input, however, will not be changed. If a design flag is turned on and the required thickness is less than the entered thickness, PVElite will increase the thickness as needed and continue.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-4
PVElite Analysis
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-5
Detail
Saddle Platform Packing Liquid Insulation Lining Rings Nozzles Saddles Trays Legs Lugs Weights Forces/Moments
Empty
# # # # # # # # # # # # #
Operating
# #
Hydrotest
# #
# # # # #
# # # # #
# # #
# # #
This step also calculates the moment due to individual details, which may not be on the centerline of the vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the support. The vertical force and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated for the 'one support' case (skirts, legs, lugs) and the vertical force at each support is calculated when there is two saddle supports. Note: In addition to computing the above weights PVElite also computes the fabricated weight, shop test weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test weight. The computed weights may or may not include removable or field installed items such as packing and other details. You can specify where these details are to be installed (either shop or field) in the Global Input. Switch to the global input screen and click the Installation Miscellaneous Options button located at the top of the screen. By default the program assumes that all details will be installed in the shop and calculate these various weights based on that assumption. The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels on saddle supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-6
PVElite Analysis
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight force at the ends or in the middle. Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at the support. If there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be negative. The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually quite small (except in the case of a large applied moment).
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel, but can cause high overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the cumulative shear and bending moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-8
PVElite Analysis
Load Case
1 NP+EW+WI+FW 2 NP+EW+EQ+FS 3 NP+OW+WI+FW 4 NP+OW+EQ+FS 5 NP+HW+HI 6 NP+HW+HE 7 IP+OW+WI+FW 8 IP+OW+EQ+FS 9 EP+OW+WI+FW 10 EP+OW+EQ+FS 11 HP+HW+HI 12 HP+HW+HE 13 IP+WE+EW 14 IP+WF+CW 15 IP+VO+OW 16 IP+VE+OW 17 IP+VF+CW
Definition
No pressure + empty weight + wind No pressure + empty weight + earthquake No pressure + operating weight + wind No pressure + operating weight + earthquake No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro earthquake Internal pressure + operating weight + wind Internal pressure + operating weight + earthquake External pressure + operating weight + wind External pressure + operating weight + earthquake Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest wind + hydro earthquake Internal pressure + wind empty + empty weight Internal pressure + wind filled + empty weight no ca Internal pressure + vortex shedding (OPE) + operating weight Internal pressure + vortex shedding (EMP) + operating weight Internal pressure+ vortex shedding (Filled) + empty weight no ca
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage) defined by the user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global Data - usually about 33% (thus setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating wind load). Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake load is a percentage of the earthquake load; this percentage is defined in the Seismic Data definition of Global Data. Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will not be printed. Also, if a vessel has no supports, then there will be no calculations that involve wind or seismic loads.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-9
Optional Steps
PVElite includes the following analyses that are performed under specific circumstances: 1 2 Cone Evaluation - cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large and small ends, and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated. Zick Stresses - stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allowable stresses using the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for each saddle, since in PVElite each saddle can have different loading. Note also that the stresses are not evaluated at the mid span, since the program automatically does that for all the various load case combinations. AISC Leg Check: After the program has computed all of the weights, forces and moments, it can then determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity check method. The program typically looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind or seismic in the operating condition and then applies the AISC method of checking the legs. The unity check must be less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical designs fall in the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good check both in terms of economy and safety. Lug Support Check: In a similar manner to the leg check the program gathers the worst loads on the support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of acceptable standards. In this case, gussets are checked by the AISC method and the lug plates are checked by common industry standard methods. These methods are outlined in common pressure design handbooks. Baserings: With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the basering, PVElite will analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry. Flanges: For main body flanges, the program will compute the required thickness of the flange, all relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen in the output are based on the input thickness. The program additionally computes the required thickness of the flange. Please note that the program does not include the forces and moments to determine an equivalent design pressure. There are separate fields in the input that can be entered in if these effects are to be considered. In order to do this two runs would have to made. After run 1 was made the forces and moments on the flange could be entered in as needed. Nozzle Analysis: Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the program based on the rules in the ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External Pressure and MAPnc. The internal pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire vessel or the exact pressure at the nozzle location. These options are located in the Global Input section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles, hillside geometries are also considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered in by using the ANG=xx.x command in the nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also computes MDMT, weld size and strength calculations along with provisions for large nozzles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of the ASME Code. Another description option is for small nozzles. If there is a small nozzle that must have area calculations performed, enter the text "#SN" as part of the nozzle description. By default PVElite will not calculate small openings for Division 1 vessels per UG-36. If local loads have been defined on the nozzle, the nozzle report will display the results from WRC 107 or PD 5500 Annex G, whichever one was selected. Fatigue Analysis: The fatigue analysis is activated when the number of pressure cycles is specified on the Design/Analysis Constraints screen. Click the Perform Fatigue Analysis button to bring up the dialog. Change the number of pressure cycles. This value must be between 1 and 20. This cumulative damage analysis is in accordance with PD:5500 2000 Annex C. In order for this analysis to activate, at least one nozzle must be specified. In the nozzle dialog, there is a check box and a pull down selection menu describing the class of the weld attachment per Annex C. Once all of the data is specified, PVElite will produce the Fatigue Analysis Report.
5 6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-10
PVElite Analysis
Tubesheet Analysis: When the vessel design Code is ASME VIII or PD 5500, tubesheets are allowed to be defined. They can be attached to flange or cylinder parent elements. PVElite will compute tubesheet required thickness, shell and tube stresses per the rules of TEMA, ASME Part UHX or PD 5500.
10 Skirt Hole Opening Analysis: For vertical skirt supported vessels, PVElite can compute bending and axial stresses due to missing material in skirt openings typically for pipe openings, vents and access openings. 11 ASME App. EE Analysis: If you have specified a helical half pipe jacket, this analysis will be performed per ASME Appendix EE. 12 ASME App. 14 large Central Opening Analysis: For Welded flat heads, the analysis of large central opening can be performed per Appendix 14.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7-11
Component Analysis
Once the program has completed the above calculations, the results may be reviewed in the output processor. These results (such as required wall thickness vs. finished wall thickness) may also be used for the evaluation of other components of the vessel. Rather than automatically analyzing all the possible vessel element details, the output processor provides component analysis for only those details selected by the user. Other details that are not part of the current vessel may also be analyzed here. This processor is described in the next chapter.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8-2
Output/Review
Generating Output
Output may be reviewed or generated for any job that has some input. Results of any previous analysis, of course, are only available if the analysis has been run. To access the output, first bring up the proper job through the File item on the Main Menu. Then, clicking on Output on the Main Menu will produce a pull-down menu that controls the program's output. The pull-down menu provides three options:
Output Menu
Review Report Review the DXF File Review the Access Database
Enters the Review processor where results of the analysis may be inspected on the screen, printed, or copied to a file. Invokes a compatible DXF processor on the machine if one exists. If a database has been created, it can be reviewed directly using Microsoft Access.
The remainder of this chapter will focus on the many capabilities of the Review processor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 8 Output/Review
8-3
The first report selected will immediately be displayed in the main window. Use the mouse to view other reports or if multiple reports are selected, press the blue right and left arrow buttons on the toolbar to cycle through the viewing of the reports.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8-4
Output/Review
Using Review
To use the Review or Output processor, simply click on the report of interest that is in right hand column of the screen. That report will then show up in the main panel. Multiple reports can be selected by holding the control (CTRL) key down while clicking the reports with the mouse. You can then use the blue arrows on the toolbar to navigate backwards and forwards through the selected reports. You can then print the reports or create a Microsoft Word document by pressing on the appropriate toolbar button at the top of the window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 8 Output/Review
8-5
Component Analysis
Analysis of vessel details is initiated from the Input Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8-6
Output/Review
The units for the component analysis are extracted from the current vessel input. In the example here, Half Pipes Jacket was selected.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 8 Output/Review
8-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8-8
Output/Review
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-2
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Introduction
The HEAT EXCHANGER program performs the analysis of heat exchangers in accordance with the following Codes: ASME Section VIII Division 1 TEMA 1998 PD 5500: 2003 The ASME tubesheet (heat exchanger) analysis rules were formerly found in Appendix AA, but in 2003, were rewritten and moved to the main body of the code, Part UHX. At the time of this writing, the heat exchanger committee is refining some details, which will be included in the program as time progresses. The TEMA and PD 5500 methods of analysis have undergone little change since the last edition of PVElite. Formerly, tubesheets could only be analyzed in the Component Analysis module of PVElite, although this facility is still available for more information see The Tubesheet Program (see "TUBESHEETS" on page 17-1), this new feature has a number of advantages not formerly available. Among these advantages are: 1 2 3 4 5 Tubesheets can be integrated into a model, including cylindrical shells (main shell and channels), heads, and nozzles in the same model. The total weight of the heat exchanger can be computed including all of its component parts Supports, such as saddles, can be analyzed directly from the integrated model, ensuring that all weights and applied loads are addressed. The tubesheet reports are part of the overall analysis. The tubesheet design code can be changed between TEMA and ASME with little modification to the input.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-4
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Note: We use English (Imperial) units throughout this exercise. We strongly recommend you use these units for this sample exercise.
Enter the information exactly as shown below for the head. The screen should then look exactly like this. Check your input before you move on. Remember, click on the text in the left column and then start typing. The cursor will automatically move to the right column. When you are finished, press Enter twice.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-5
Click the Cylinder icon to add a cylinder to the head. Ensure the input for the new cylinder has exactly this appearance:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-6
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Click the Body Flange icon to add a body flange to the right hand end of the channel shell. After adding the flange enter all the values exactly as shown below.
Click the Perform Flange Calculation box, and the Flange dialog will display.
We need to correctly dimension the flange. To do this, change the flange as it appears to a 24 inch Class 150 flange, which will fit into our heat exchanger.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-7
Click the Perform Flange Calculations box and the Flange dialog automatically displays. At the bottom of the new Flange dialog you will see a section that resembles this:
Select 150 as the Class, 24 for the Nom then click ANSI Dim Lookup. The flange screen is now set up for the 24 inch Class 150 dimensions and bolting. Verify your screen resembles this:
Up to this point, we have been using the normal vessel building techniques that PVElite uses for building non-heat exchanger pressure vessels. We are now ready to start the construction (build the model) of the heat exchanger main elements, the tubesheets, tubes and main shell that enclose the tube bundle. 8 Look at the Heat Exchanger button you will see that it is no longer disabled, as there is now a component to which to attach the first tubesheet.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-8
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Click the Heat Exchanger button the Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog displays. We will now construct an ASME Section UHX exchanger, which requires a large amount of input data.
10 From the Exchanger Type box, click the arrow, and select Fixed. Your screen should now resemble this:
11 Click the Tubesheet Properties tab and enter the following information exactly as it displays below. Note the type of tubesheet we have chosen: b Fixed Tubesheet, shell integral, extended as flange. Note also that we enabled the Tubesheet Extended as Flange? box.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-9
12 Click the Tube Data tab and enter the information as it displays below.
We need to enter the pressures and temperatures for our heat exchanger to complete the tubesheet and tubes data. 13 Click the Load Cases tab and enter the information shown below.
PVElite enables users to enter multiple combinations of pressures and temperatures for heat exchangers. 14 From the bottom of the dialog screen, click OK and the Data Input screen will display. Look at the 3D model on your screen, and it should resemble this figure.
Notice that there is no cylindrical shell between the two tubesheets. PVElite cannot perform tubesheet analysis unless the shell is present, because the thermal load from the shell is needed to complete this analysis. So, we must add the shell between the tubesheets. Before we do this, recall that we stated in the Heat Exchanger dialog that the tubes were 60 inches long. This is the distance between the tubesheets. So for a good match, the outer shell must also be 60 inches long. Also note that there are only two rows of tubes displayed. Because of the intensive nature of 3D graphics it is impractical to show hundreds of tubes. Doing so would render the 3D model useless.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-10
HEAT EXCHANGERS
15 Click the Cylindrical Shell icon, to add a cylindrical shell to our model. This shell is 60 inches or 5 feet long as discussed above. Verify your entries match those below:
All that remains is for us to add the body flange to the right end of our heat exchanger, then another channel shell and the final right channel head. Before doing so, your model should look like this.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-11
You should be able to do this by yourself. Do so, and we can then proceed to the final step. You are able free to add saddle supports, nozzles, and any other loads that apply.
Each tab displays a different data area which where users can enter heat exchanger information. We are going to discuss each tab and its data area in turn. This section of the manual is concerned with the Tubesheet Type and Design Code tab. The Tubesheet Analysis Method
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-12
HEAT EXCHANGERS
From the list box, choose the code you wish to use for the analysis. Available choices are: ASME UHX - which is ASME Section VIII Division 1, Section UHX PD 5500 - The British Pressure Vessel Code, Section 3.9 - Flat Heat Exchanger Tubesheets TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association Note: In the case of PD 5500 if you previously selected PD:5500 on the Constraints dialog, then PD 5500 is the only choice available in this drop down box. Exchanger Type
From the list box, choose the type of tubesheet configuration you wish to analyze. The choices are U-Tube - This is where there is only one tubesheet, and each tube is in the form of a U shape so that both ends of the tube are in the same single tubesheet. Fixed - Fixed tubesheets are fixed to either end of the exchanger and are subject to thermal loads imposed by expansion. Floating - The right hand tubesheet is free and as the tubes expand or contract from thermal effects, the tubesheet is free to move with the tube bundle. These sketches illustrate the three basic types of exchangers:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-13
Depending on the code and type of exchanger you have chosen, the relevant fields will be come available for you to enter the respective information. Let us consider first the ASME frame: Floating Exchanger Type (ASME Specific) If you have chosen the ASME Floating Head Type Exchanger, the following frame becomes active. From the list box, select the type of floating head as illustrated just below:
The various types of exchanger as shown in the ASME code have the following floating head configurations.
The U-Tube Tubesheet Stress Reduction Option If your design is a 'U-Tube' type exchanger, the following frame is active. From the list box choose stress reduction option:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-14
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Tell PVElite what it must do in the event the model must be changed because of over stress. Available choices are: Increase the Tubesheet Thickness Increase the Integral Cylinder Thickness Increase Both the Cylinder and Tubesheet Perform Elastic-Plastic Calculation Enter the method you wish PVElite to use to reduce any over stress condition. TEMA Specific Information If you had chosen TEMA as the design code, the TEMA frame would have become active like this:
Before discussing the three drop down list boxes labeled: TEMA Exchanger Notation, consider the nomenclature used by the TEMA code. TEMA divides a typical heat exchanger into three sections, namely: the Front Channel, the Shell and the Rear Channel respectively. The different types are assigned letters. The following table which has been taken from the TEMA code gives shows the letters, and the corresponding designs for these three sections of the heat exchanger: For more details, please refer to the TEMA code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-15
From the list boxes, enter your chosen configuration. The following example shows a common heat exchanger configuration:
From the TEMA Exchanger Class list box select the appropriate class. Available choices are: Class R Class C Class B
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-16
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Each Class has certain design constraints imposed from the TEMA Code, such as tube pitch, baffle spacing, number of tie rods etc. The computations for each Class is identical, but the limitations are different.
Tubesheet Properties
This section is concerned with the Tubesheet Properties as shown on the second tab of the main exchanger input screen. Clicking the Tubesheet Properties tab, you will get the following dialog screen:
Description Enter the description you wish to include on your report for the tubesheet analysis section. In the above example, we have set the Description to: 'MY EXCHANGER'. Element From Node This is the element to which the tubesheet is attached. Suppose for example, you want to attach the tubesheet to Node 50 (as illustrated below), and the wrong Node Number is shown in the text box (shown as 30 above), you must enable this field, to do this press F8. You will now be able to enter the number 50 in this field. Distance from Node
Be careful here. The distance from node is the distance from the left hand end of the component to which the first tubesheet is attached. We illustrate this distance as follows:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-17
Tubesheet Type
Enter the type of tubesheet you are to design or analyze. From the drop down list box choose the tubesheet type from this list: If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a Fixed Tubesheet type exchanger, you would be presented with these choices: Fixed Tubesheets, integral both sides Fixed Tubesheets, shell integral, extended as flange Fixed Tubesheets, shell integral, not extended as flange Fixed Tubesheets, gasketed both sides If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a U-Tube type exchanger, you would be presented with these choices: U-tubesheet, integral both sides U-tubesheet, integral with shell U-tubesheet, gasketed on both sides U-tubesheet, integral with channel If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a Floating Head type exchanger, you would be presented with these choices: Stationary tubesheets, integral with both sides Stationary tubesheets, integral with shell
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-18 Stationary tubesheets, gasketed on both sides Stationary tubesheets, integral with channel
HEAT EXCHANGERS
From the list above, the following illustrations explain the meanings of the some of the terms used above:
In the top left picture above, the tubesheet is shown integral with the shell. However if the tubes were to point to the left instead of the right, then the tubesheet would be integral with the channel. Outside Diameter, Tubesheet Thickness and Corrosion Allowance Shell side / Channel side
Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet. If the tubesheet extends beyond the shell (or channel) then enter that diameter. However, if the shell is integral with either the shell, or the channel, then enter the inside diameter of the shell or channel as applies. Enter the balance of the information for the tubesheet new thickness, and the corrosion on the shell and channel sides. When PVElite calculates the stresses, it will deduct both of these corrosion allowances. These entries are straight forward. Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (in any)
If there is a groove across the tubesheet for a pass partition, then enter the depth of this groove. The depth of this groove is deducted from the thickness of the tubesheet during the calculation process. This is an illustration of a pass partition located into the tubesheet. At the bottom of the groove, there is usually a gasket which PVElite refers to as the Pass Partition Gasket (see elsewhere in this manual where flanges are discussed):
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-19
Enter the fillet leg size of the weld between the shell and the tubesheet, or the channel and the tubesheet as the case may be if there is such a weld. This is the type of weld meant here:
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? / Thickness of Extended Portion / Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet?
If the tubesheet extends beyond the outside shell / channel diameter, and this extension is attached to a body flange, then check the Tubesheet Extended as Flange box. The thickness of the part of the tubesheet that is extended as a flange may be the same or a different thickness from the rest of the flange. Enter the thickness of the tubesheet extension. If the tubesheet is bolted to a flange (either on the channel side or shell side), and the bolts produce a moment on the edge of the tubesheet, then check the Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet box. Here we illustrate a tubesheet extended as a flange. In this illustration the tubesheet is subject to the bolt force, and is therefore experiences the bolt load, which is transferred from the flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-20
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Backing Ring
If there is a backing ring at the back of the tubesheet, we need the details. Here is an illustration of a tubesheet with a backing ring:
Enter the thickness of the backing ring, Enter the Outside and Inside Diameters of the Backing Ring, and the effective diameter of the gasket(s) - G. To accurately determine the effective diameter of the gasket 'G', you are referred to ASME VIII Division 1 - Appendix 2 Table 2-5.2. For a flat gasket, a typical procedure for finding the value of G is as follows: N = (O/Dia of gasket - I/Dia of gasket) / 2 bo = N / 2 If bo > 1/4 in. then b = Sqrt( bo ) / 2 and G = O/Dia of Gasket - 2.b If bo <= 1/4 in. then b = (O/Dia of gasket + I/Dia of gasket) / 2 However, the user is urged to check the formula that applies to the type of gasket chosen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-21
If you have selected the analysis to be performed in accordance with ASME Section UHX, and you have a fixed tubesheet heat exchanger, you will then be asked if there are shell bands. Here is what shell bands look like:
If there is a shell band (see above illustration), then check the Is there a Shell Band box. Then, enter the shell dimensions in the appropriate fields as indicated in the above illustration. Thicker shell bands are used in areas where the shell would be too highly stressed, and the thicker sections will reduce the stresses in the region of the tubesheets. PD 5500 Specific
If you chose PD:5500 as your code on the Constraint screen, the frame shown above becomes active. From the list box, choose the combination of the way the tubesheet is restrained in the heat exchanger. The following choices are available: Stationary Simply / Floating Simply Stationary Simply / Floating Clamped Stationary Clamped / Floating Simply Stationary Clamped / Floating Clamped PD:5500 uses the following diagram to explain the meaning of tubesheets that are Simply Supported, and tubesheets that are Clamped. PVElite uses this information to determine which PD:5500 graphs to use to obtain certain values required in the computation of the tubesheet analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-22
HEAT EXCHANGERS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-23
Number of Holes Enter the number of tubes in the tube bundle (the number of holes in one tubesheet). Pattern From the list box, choose the arrangement of the tubes in the tube bundle. Here are the two arrangements:
Wall Thickness Enter the wall thickness of the tube. If you have finned tubes, it is usual to enter the thickness of the tubes ignoring the fins (usually referred to as the root thickness of the tube). Corrosion Allowance If the tubes are subject to a corrosion allowance, then enter the corrosion allowance of the tubes. PVElite will as one of its load cases check the stresses in the corroded conditions (see Load Cases below). Outside Diameter Enter the Outside Diameter of the tubes. Tube Pitch Enter the center to center distance between the tubes. See the diagram above. Length of Expanded Portion of Tube Enter the distance the tube is expanded into the tubesheet. This is illustrated below:
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center Enter the Distance from the Center of the Tubesheet to the Centerline of the furthest tube. This is the distance from the center of the tubesheet to the center of the furthest tube.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-24
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Distance Between Innermost Tube Centers Between passes there are often open lanes to provide space for partitions in the channels that control the flow of the fluid in the tubes. This distance is often greater than the pitch in the main areas of the tube bundle. Enter this distance, even if it is the same as the general tube pitch (see above). If there are no pass partitions then this value must be 0. This distance is illustrated thus:
PD 5500 or TEMA / ASME Fixed Tubesheet Input If you chose a fixed tubesheet type design, then following frame will be activated for entry of required information. We cover the fields in order:
Max Distance from Tubesheet to 1st Tube Support and Max Distance Between 2 Tube Supports Tube supports are often referred to baffles. Not only do these tube supports or baffles support the tubes, but they also control the path taken by the shell side fluid. If the tubes are subjected to axial compression, they act as struts or slender columns, and are subject to buckling. Tube supports or baffles help to shorten the effective lengths of the tubes, thus providing support from sagging and compression. The distances are illustrated here:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-25
End Condition k / Max. Unsupported Len SL The end condition controls the effective length of the tube against buckling. TEMA and PD:5500 specify appropriate values for 'k' as follows:
From the above table, enter the appropriate value of 'k'. Length SL Enter the distance between the points of support as indicated in the left most column of the above table associated with the chosen value 'k'. Tube-Tubesheet Weld (TEMA / ASME)
This section of the input screen is concerned with the strength of the joint between the tubesheet and the tube. Tubes can be installed in the tubesheet by being expanded to grip the hole in the tubesheet, or can be fixed by welding. It is also possible to use a combination of expanding and welding, where the weld is merely a seal weld, not a strength weld. PVElite determines the effectiveness (strength) of this joint to investigate if the joint is strong enough to withstand the axial forces to which the tube is subjected during service.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-26 Fillet Weld Leg Size (If Any) If there is a weld between the tube and the tubesheet, then enter the fillet leg size. Groove Weld Leg Size (If Any)
HEAT EXCHANGERS
If the tubesheet is chamfered in order that the attachment weld partially penetrates the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld size. This is the type to tube to tubesheet weld being considered:
Tube Weld Joint Type PVElite needs to know the degree of support the weld contributes to the tube to tubesheet joint. From the drop down list box choose from the following:
Type
Full Strength Partial Seal
Description
where the weld alone provides the strength to the joint where the weld provides support in combination with the fact that the tube is expanded to grip the tube hole where the weld only serves to prevent leakage, and does not contribute to the strength of the joint.
Design Strength (Only for U-Tubes) In the case of U-Tube exchangers, where the tubes are welded to the tubesheet with a full strength weld, PVElite will calculate the required weld size to withstand the load entered by the user. In this field, enter a suitable axial load on the tubes from the loadings they expected to experience in service. Allowable Joint Load Method This list box is only active if you are designing an exchanger in accordance with the ASME code. PVElite will compute the Allowable Joint Load either using Appendix A, or according to Section UW-20 of the code. Select from the drop down list box one of the following: ASME Appendix A ASME UW-20
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-27
Is the Tube Tubesheet Joint Tested ASME in its Appendix A provides a procedure for testing the strength of the tube to tubesheet joint. If this test is performed, then the actual strength is known, and this provides for a higher degree of confidence in the integrity of the joint. If the joint configuration has been tested in accordance with the stated procedure, then check this box. In the case of PD 5500 there is also a procedure for testing the tube tubesheet joint. This procedure is to be found in the publication BS 4870-3 obtained from the British Standards Institution. Tube Joint Reliability Factor (table 3-9-2) The Joint Reliability Factor is determined by the type of tube to tubesheet joint, and the code. The ASME and PD 5500 codes have different reliability factors. Here are the reliability factors for the two codes (for TEMA exchangers, choose the ASME values):
Here, two values are called for, namely: Po and Pt. Po is the pressure that exists between the outside of the tube after the tube is expanded into the tubesheet, and Pt is the pressure that will exist on the outside of the tube once the exchanger is in service. These values are difficult to obtain presently as the ASME code gives little guidance. This is a representation of the pressure on the outside of the tube once it is expanded into the tubesheet:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-28
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Exchanger tubes are available as either seamless or welded products. If the tubes are of welded construction then check this box.
If there is an expansion joint in the main shell between the tubesheets (which only applies to tubesheets fixed to each end of the shell), then PVElite needs to know all the details of the expansion joint to compute its flexibility (or spring rate), as the expansion joint plays a role in the axial forces that exist between the shell and the tubes as a result mainly of the thermal growth of the shell and tubes relative to each other. Type of Expansion Joint (If any)
From the above list box choose the type of expansion joint employed in your design. The choices are:
Joint Type
No Joint Thin Bellows Thick Joint
Description
If there is no expansion joint present If the expansion joint is a many convolution thin metal bellows per ASME Appendix 26 if the expansion joint is made up of pressed elements - either per TEMA or ASME Appendix 5
We here illustrate the type of expansion joints. Note the dimension of each type, as you will be required to enter the relevant dimension details for the joint type you choose: This the Thick Joint as prescribed by the TEMA Code:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-29
Note: TEMA refers to each of the elements shown below as a Shell Element. One convolution comprises 2 shell elements. Please take a note of this, it follows that shell elements exist in pairs and that the number of shell elements required is twice the number of convolutions.
If you choose the thin joint as shown above, then the axial stiffness will be set to zero by PVElite unless a value is entered (see below), as this type of joint is very flexible.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-30
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Make a note of the nomenclature and dimensions in the above figures, you will need them for the type of expansion joint you install in your model. You need to gather all the information before you begin entering the data that follows. Number of Flexible Shell Elements (1 Convolution = 2 Fsa)
This field only applies to Thick Joints which comprise shell elements (described just above). An alternative way of looking at this information is to ask yourself how many PAIRS of elements do I need to make up the number of convolutions needed. Remember, the greater the number of convolutions, the greater the flexibility. This flexibility is affected by the dimensions, thickness of the vertical legs of the elements, and the number of elements employed in the expansion joint. Enter the number of shell elements in the expansion joint. Distance From Node
The start of the expansion joint must be located somewhere in the shell to which in which it is installed. The Distance From the Node is shown below:
Design Option
From the list box choose from the list: Existing Analyze If you wish to enter the details of an existing expansion component, then you will be required to enter the spring rate and other information. However, if you required PVElite to compute the flexibility of the expansion joint, then select Analyze from this list box. The command button labeled Set Defaults enable you to toggle between using the actual dimensions of the expansion joint elements (which you will have to enter). In this way, once you have entered the geometric data, you will be able to quickly change from a full analysis to using the flexibility values for an existing joint.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-31
In the case of thick walled expansion joints, and you want PVElite to compute the axial stiffness (or flexibility) enter the dimensions for one shell element (defined above). You will be able to see the nomenclature related to the shell element from the thumbnail picture on the input screen. Desired Cycle Life
During service, the expansion joint will experience a number (cycles) of expansions and contractions from the changing temperatures and pressures during its lifetime. PVElite computes the maximum number of cycles the expansion joint is able to withstand. A number must be typed into this field. PVElite will compare the computed number of cycles with the user entered value. User Input Spring Rate
These fields only apply if the user has entered 'Existing' in the Design Option field above. Enter the spring rate for both the Corroded and Uncorroded states. The Outer Cylinder
If there is an Outer Cylinder between two shell element pairs like this:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-32
HEAT EXCHANGERS
From the figure showing the TEMA Thick Joint dimensions above, enter the Material, and outer cylinder dimensions for the diameters and any corrosion allowances.
Load Cases
Click the Load Cases tab
During operation, and during its service life a heat exchanger is subject to different combinations of pressure and temperature. PVElite enables the user to set up to 8 combinations known as Load Cases. Some of these load case might include the initial and periodic hydrostatic pressure tests, normal predicted service, and upset or emergency conditions where unusual conditions may apply such as sudden plant shut down, cold start up etc. Performing these calculations could be extremely tedious and time consuming. PVElite not only considers up to 8 load cases, but also considers each of these load cases for both corroded and un-corroded conditions as well as the possibility of a vacuum being encountered for any one of these load cases. This could in an extreme case mean that up to 128 different conditions are being computed.
From the Number of cases to process drop down box select a number between 1 and 8. This sets the total number of load cases PVElite will include in its analysis. From the Active Load Case counter click on the arrow to navigate through the load cases, as only one load case at a time will appear on the screen. In the example above, 2 load cases have been specified, but the input screen will only accept information for load case number 1. Let's consider all the information thus ensuring that sufficient information is entered for each load case. Remember, if for example 8 load cases are chosen, then PVElite expects the user has entered all the information for every load case.
In the Case Description field, type a meaningful description of this code case. This will be included in the final report generated by PVElite. Just to the right of the Case Description field is a command button that looks like this:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-33
It is important to realize that the load cases shown in the left hand column in the illustration above are NOT the load cases entered on the parent screen. Use the table below to identify the meanings of the symbols used in the Report Print Options dialog. Descriptor
Fvs Fvt Ps Pt Th
Description
This is the user defined shell side pressure set to a full vacuum This is the user defined tube side pressure set to a full vacuum The user defined shell side design pressure The user defined tube side design pressure Thermal Expansion: +Th means with thermal expansion and -Th means without thermal expansion
For example: Ps + Fvt + Th tells PVElite to use the design pressure in the shell, a vacuum in the tubes, and also to include thermal expansion from temperature differentials.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-34
HEAT EXCHANGERS Fvs + Fvt - Th tells PVElite to use a vacuum in the shell, a vacuum in the tubes, but to ignore thermal expansion. ASME: In the case of the ASME analysis, PVElite will only run cases 1, 2, 3 and 8 TEMA / PD 5500: In the case of these codes, PVElite will run all cases.
Once you have set up the load cases, click OK to close the dialog. Remember, this combination of load cases is available for each major load case entered on the parent screen. As can be seen, it is possible to have a large number of total combinations, so only enter cases that are absolutely necessary, because the computation time can be long, and the report can generate a lot of output. Let us now return to the parent screen:
Across the top of the figure the following headings are located: Shell, Channel, Tubes, Tubesheet and Shell Band. Running down the left hand side are the following labels: Design Pressure, Design Temperature, Material, Metal Temperature along length, Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim and Database lookup and Properties. Design Pressure Enter the design pressure for the shell and the channel (tube side). Design Temperature Enter the design temperature for the Shell, Channel, Tubes, Tubesheet and Shell Band. This is the maximum design temperature. PVElite will use this temperature to determine the allowable stresses, coefficient of expansion and Young's Modulus. These temperatures are typically higher than the actual metal temperatures. Material Underneath each component is two command buttons Tubes, and a Right Arrow.
Clicking the Tubes button displays a list of materials from which users can select the appropriate material. Clicking the Arrow button displays the details of the current material for that component. At this point, verify that the information in the detail screen is complete, including the yield stresses, and any other information. PVElite uses this information to determine the mechanical properties of the component. The material definitions are only available for load case 1. So if it is desired to change the material for any component, then select load case 1 from the spin box discussed above.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-35
Metal Temperature Along the Length This field refers to the Actual Metal temperatures - often called the Mean Metal Temperature for a specific component. These temperatures are used to compute the thermal expansion of the shell and tubes. Users must be as accurate as possible when assigning these values, because thermal expansions can be the major contributor to axial stresses. Not much information is available for determining these temperatures, but TEMA section T-4 supplies a suggestion. However, the determination of these temperatures is complex, and much information is required to attempt their derivation. Modulus of Elasticity
If the User-defined values box is checked, then users may enter user defined values for Young's Modulus. Users are cautioned to ensure that the defined values are realistic. Typically this check box is not enabled in those instances PVElite uses its internal database to find these values. This is usually considered the safer method to use. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
If the User-defined values box is checked, then users may enter user-defined values for the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion. Users are cautioned that if user-defined values are used, ensure they are realistic. Typically this check box is not enabled in those instances PVElite uses its internal database to find these values. This is usually considered the safer method to use. Differential Design Pressure
In the case of TEMA and PD 5500 only, the codes allow users to have PVElite compute the stresses using only the Differential Design Pressures (difference between Shell and Tube sides as defined) combination only. If this field is left as a zero input, PVElite will ignore the field, and will carry out the computation for all the combinations of pressure. The differential pressure selection assumes that these are the ONLY pressure that will be encountered for this load case. The user is cautioned that typically, this field would be left as zero unless the user is absolutely certain that this case only need be considered. Expansion Joint Material and Differential Pressure Design
If an expansion joint is present, then the material for that joint is required. Clicking the Matl.. button displays a list of materials from which the appropriate material may be selected. The Arrow button is used to view the actual material characteristics. Click this button to verify all the information is available including the yield stress values.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-36
HEAT EXCHANGERS
PVElite requires this information during the computation of the thermal stress, and all relevant information must be available to the program. PD 5500 Specific Information
Selecting PD 5500 for the exchanger requires other information concerning the materials of construction. From each of the drop down boxes, users must designate the material class. Plain Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel C-Si, C-1/2 Mo and Cr-1/2 Mo Steel C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo and 3Cr - 1Mo Steel Mn - Mo Steel 2-1/2 and 3-1/2 Ni Steel Sea-Cure Steel C-Si, C-1/2 Mo and Cr -1/2 Mo and 3Cr-1Mo Steel C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo and 3Cr-1Mo 33Cr-31Ni-32Fe-1.5Mo-6Cu-N Steel For more information refer to PD 5500.
Floating Tubesheets
Click the Floating Tubesheets tab.
If you have chosen to analyze a Floating Tubesheet, you will be presented with the following input screen:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-37
Let us consider each field in turn: Description Enter a meaningful description for the floating head that will be included in the final report generated by PVElite. Floating Tubesheet Type
From the list box select one of the following: In the case of TEMA / PD 5500 Exchangers, the list is as follows (P) Floating tubesheet, outside packed (T) Floating Tubesheet, pull through floating head (S) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, not extended, with backing device (W) Floating tubesheet, externally sealed. In the case of ASME Exchangers, the list is as follows: (a) Floating tubesheet, integral (b) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, extended as a flange (c) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, not extended with backing device (d) Floating tubesheet, internally sealed. The floating heads for the TEMA / PD 5500 codes is illustrated below:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-38
HEAT EXCHANGERS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-39
Outside Diameter Enter the outside diameter of the floating tubesheet. Tubesheet Thickness Enter the Actual Thickness of the Tubesheet. Corrosion Allowance Enter the Corrosion Allowances for both the Shell and Channel sides. This corrosion allowance will be deducted when computing the tubesheet stresses for the corroded condition calculation. Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any)
If there is a groove across the tubesheet for a pass partition, then enter the depth of this groove. The depth of this groove is deducted from the thickness of the tubesheet during the calculation process. Below is an illustration of a
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-40
HEAT EXCHANGERS
pass partition located into the tubesheet. At the bottom of the groove, there is usually a gasket, which PVElite refers to as the Pass Partition Gasket (see elsewhere in this manual where flanges are discussed):
If the floating tubesheet is extended as a flange to be bolted to a body flange, then check the box: Tubesheet Extended as Flange. The thickness of the part of the tubesheet that is extended as a flange may be the same or a different thickness from the rest of the flange. Enter the Thickness of Extended Portion.
If you selected the ASME Floating Tubesheet for Configuration A analysis, then enter the New Channel Thickness tc and the Design Temperature.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-41
Use the command buttons to choose the appropriate material, and ensure that all the data fields (click the right command button) are entered including the yield strength. PD 5500
If you selected PD:5500 from the Constraint dialog, the PD 5500 frame becomes active. From the list box, choose the combination of the way the tubesheet is restrained in the heat exchanger. The choices available: Stationary Simply / Floating Simply Stationary Simply / Floating Clamped Stationary Clamped / Floating Simply Stationary Clamped / Floating Clamped PD:5500 uses the following diagram to explain the meaning of Tubesheets that are Simply Supported, and Tubesheets that are Clamped. PVElite also uses this information to determine which PD:5500 graphs to use to obtain certain values required in the computation of the tubesheet analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-42
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Description
Enter an appropriate description that describes the type of bolted cover for reference in the final report generated by PVElite. Type of Floating Head
PVElite will analyze four different type of Floating Heat (Bolted Cover). They are illustrated here:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-43
From the illustration just above, enter the following information which is specific to the bolted cover (not the mating flange or backing device): Design Temperature of the Bolted Cover The Inside Crown Radius of the spherical cap, or formed dome (see the illustration above) The Head Thickness. This is the thickness of the spherical or domed portion of the cover. Head Internal Corrosion Allowance (this is the tube side). Enter the corrosion allowance. Head External Corrosion Allowance (this is the shell side). Enter the corrosion allowance. Flange Thickness. In the above illustration, this is the thickness of the actual flange part of the bolted cover, not the spherical cap. Once you have selected the type of cover (a, b, c or d), a new screen opens up. This screen is for the flange, gasket and bolting details. A partial view of this input screen is shown thus: For details in completing the data in this screen, please refer to the section titled Bolted Cover Mating Flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-44
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Continuing with the input: The remainder of the required data is thus:
Slotted Flange If the flange is slotted, check this box. This is an illustration of a slotted flange:
Have a care, because slotted flanges are very much weaker than conventional flanges. Perform Soehren's Calculation A more detailed analysis of bolted dished heads is included, based on Soehren's analysis, "The Design of Floating heads for Heat-Exchangers", ASME 57-A-7-47. The more detailed analysis may be used for the design of floating heads, as specifically mentioned in the ASME Code, Paragraph 1-6 (h). Dimension Q If you have checked the box to perform the Soehren's Calculation, then enter the 'Q' dimension as shown below:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-45
Head and Flange Materials Use the left hand command button in each case to select the material from the drop down list box, and use the right hand command button to view the properties. Verify all the properties are included, including the yield value, which you may have to enter yourself for a non-ASME material. Compute 'F' Even if the Pressure is Zero In ASME Division 1, Appendix 1 for the type 'd' head, the thickness of the head is computed using a derived 'F' value. 'F' is a function of the pressure, therefore, for the initial bolt-up condition 'F' would become zero. Some are of the opinion that the 'F' value should never be zero, but that the value of 'F' computed for the operating condition should be used. If you wish to have PVElite use a non-zero value of 'F', then check this box. Dimension hr
In the illustration of a type 'd' head (see illustration above), the distance 'hr' can be entered in two different ways. If the distance 'hr' is known, then enter this value in the upper box. However, if you know the distance from the top of the flange to where the top of the spherical cap (Head) intersects the inside diameter of the flange, then enter this dimension, and when the Compute button is clicked, PVElite will compute the value of 'hr'. Backing Ring Data
If there is a backing ring (or backing device) behind the tubesheet, then check the Is There a Backing Ring box. Backing Ring Material Select the backing ring material and check all the data is complete as discussed above for other components. Backing Ring Inside Diameter / Outside Diameter Enter the Inside Diameter and the Outside Diameter of the Backing Ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-46 Backing Ring Thickness Enter the thickness of the backing ring. Number of Splits in Backing Ring
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Sometimes backing rings are split diametrically to facilitate assembly. More than one split ring may be employed in the construction of the backing ring for added strength. Illustrated below are two rings each of which is split diametrically, the splits being located at 90 degrees to each other. Enter the number of rings that are split. For the diagram below the number of splits would be two. If the backing ring is not split then enter zero from the list box.
In the above illustration, there are two backing rings, each of which is split. In this case, The number of splits in Backing Ring would be entered as '2'.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-47
A typical tubesheet extended as a flange subject to the bolting moment has the following appearance and dimensions:
Flanged Portion ID / OD Enter the Inside Diameter of the Cover Flange, and the Outside Diameter of the Cover Flange
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Enter the Inside Diameter of the Flange Raised Face, and the Outside Diameter of the Flange Raised Face. Gasket ID / OD Enter the Inside Diameter of the Gasket, and the Outside Diameter of the Gasket. Gasket m / y From ASME VIII Division 1 - Appendix 2, Table 2-5.1, enter the gasket seating factor 'm' factor, and the gasket seating stress 'y'. In the case of a PD:5500 exchanger, refer to Table 3-8.4 Flange Face Sketch / Column From ASME Table 2-5.1 or PD:5500 Table 3-8.4, select facing sketch and column number from the drop down list boxes. Gasket Thickness Enter the thickness of the gasket. This value is not used in the tubesheet computation, but is included in the final report. Nubbin Width Referring to the above illustration, the Nubbin Width is the tongue defined by the inside and outside diameters of the raised face. Partition Gasket Details If the channel has a partition plate (see the manual section 'Tubesheet Properties' for a sketch of this arrangement), or gasket then enter the length and width of the partition plate or gasket. In this way, PVElite with include the extra forces to compress the gasket at the location of the partition plate. Partition Gasket m / y As in the case of the main gasket, enter the values of m and y specific to the partition gasket. Typically, these vales would be the same as the m and y values for the main gasket as discussed above. Number of Bolts Enter the number of bolts that connect the cover to the tubesheet. Bolt Circle Diameter / Nominal Bolt Diameter Enter the diameter of the circle where the bolts are located around the flange, and the nominal diameter of each bolt. Thread Series From the drop down list box select: TEMA UNC User Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-49
British Standard South African Standard The purpose of this box is to determine the root area of the thread in the determination of the bolt load applied to the flanged joint. Bolt Design Temperature Enter the Design Temperature of the bolts. This temperature should not be less than the Design Temperature of the flange or tubesheet, whichever is the larger. Bolt Material As discussed in other areas of this manual, select the Bolt Material from the list box ensuring that all fields contain correct information, especially the value of the yield value in the case of non-ASME materials. Alternate Bolt Loads (used if greater than calculated values) If you wish to enter the Wm1, Wm2 and W to over-ride the values computed by PVElite, then enter these values. They will only be used if they exceed the valued computed by PVElite.
Precautionary Note
Tubesheets Integral with Shell Only When a tubesheet is defined by the user as being Integral with the Shell and Channel, PVElite expects the design to look like this:
Notice this important point: PVElite expects the tubesheet to be welded to both the Channel, and the Shell. The reason for this as follows: The program computes the pressure and loads on the channel side using the dimensions of the channel The program computes the pressure and loads on the shell side using the dimensions of the shell. The shell and channel sides can have different thicknesses and different corrosion allowances. If for example, the Channel side were of thin Austenitic steel with no corrosion allowance, and the Shell side were of thick Carbon steel with a large corrosion allowance, then the corroded diameters of the shell and channel sides would be different when PVElite computes the stresses in the corroded condition.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9-50
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Provided the user constructs the heat exchanger as shown above, this will not create a problem, because PVElite knows the dimensions of both the shell and channel sides. However: Suppose the user constructed the exchanger like this:
there would be a problem. Looking carefully at this type of construction, the tubesheet is inserted fully into the main shell, and does NOT connect to the channel. With this type of construction, PVElite will use the dimension of the Channel for the channel side, and the dimension of the Shell for the shell side. This would give incorrect results, because both the shell and channel sides should be computed using only the shell dimensions. How can we solve this problem? The best way of solving the problem is for the user to include a dummy piece of channel as an extra component into the design (both ends of the exchanger in the case of a fixed tubesheet exchanger). This is how the dummy channel can be introduced by the user to correct the problem:
By introducing this Dummy Channel, which has the identical dimensions, corrosion allowance and material specification as the main shell between the two tubesheets, PVElite will now correctly compute the stresses based upon the correct components.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-4
Main Menu
CodeCalc starts with the Data Input screen. Across the top of this screen is a line of items, which comprise the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions of the program. This chapter will review the functions available in each of these menu items. The items in the Main Menu - File, Edit, Analysis, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, View, ESL and Help - may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character while pressing the Alt key. For example, the Output processor may be selected by pressing the Alt and O keys simultaneously. First, we will begin by going over each of the Main Menu options.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-5
File Menu
The FILE MENU controls the general operations of CodeCalc files. Options that are displayed in the menu with an ellipsis () cause a file manage window to appear when selected.
File Menu
The FILE MENU may be used to: New - Starts or opens a new or existing file.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
This gives you access to files that have previously been created by CodeCalc. Simply double click on the file name, or enter the file name into the File Name field, and the file will be loaded, and you will be able to make any changes to the components it contains. When OPEN is selected the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type *.cci will be displayed for selection. Save - Saves the current file in its present condition. However, if the file is being saved for the first time, you will need to give the file a name. For saving the first time, you will get the Save As menu. Save As - Saves a file that has not been previously named or saves the current file under another name.
Print - Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a postscript or laser jet printer. Print Preview - Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above). Print Setup - Displays the standard Windows printer setup screen. Exit - Exits CodeCalc. A message window will appear to give the user a last opportunity to save any modifications to the current job. The File Menu also lists the last four vessel input files. Any of these files can be opened with a mouse click.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-7
Edit Menu
Once a file is selected, the EDIT MENU indicates the options available for editing.
Edit Menu
Title Page - Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. Project Data - Allows the user to enter up to 3 title lines, which appear at the top of each page of the printed reports. Add New Item - Allows the user to enter a new item Insert New Item - Inserts a new element after the current element. Delete Current Item - Deletes the current element. Select All - Selects all of the items in the browse window. Deselect All - Clears all of the items in the browse window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-8
Analysis Menu
The ANALYSIS options cause the program to quit the input process and enter the analysis process. CodeCalc will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename, and then process the analysis.
Analysis Menu
The following options are available: Analyze Current Item - Performs the analysis of the current component. Analyze Selected Items - This option will perform calculations for selected analysis types. The calculations will be saved in a binary file and will be ready for display or printing. Summary - This option will look through all the data in the current analysis file and prepare a brief summary of each analysis. Choose Analysis Type - Use this option to select the type of component you wish to work on. The various analysis types are shown in the figure above. The analysis types chosen from this menu can also be selected from the Analysis toolbar by clicking the icon.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-9
Output Menu
Output Menu
Review - Allows the user to review the analysis results of the current job, if those results are available.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-10
Tools Menu
The TOOLS MENU controls the utility processors and drawing options.
Tools Menu
The following options are available: Configuration Enables users to set some specific program computation control parameters.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-12
If you want to use US Gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The program will use cubic units if the default value is not checked. For all other units, the volume prints in liters if this box is checked. A note of caution: A US gallon is smaller than an Imperial gallon as defined in Europe. The difference is that a US gallon is 3.7854 liters, and an Imperial gallon is 4.5461 liters. This is mentioned as the program considers only the US gallon.
Users can choose from several different material years. Each material year contains a complete database listing of materials, their allowable design stresses and other relevant properties.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-13
Select the year required. If a different material database is selected from the one used for the current set of components update the materials by re-selecting them from the material database before performing the computations.
Miscellaneous Tab
The MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS of the CONFIGURATION MENU lets the user select some miscellaneous directives. These directives control some printout style options and others. Following is a description of the options:
Report Content
This directive allows the user to change the length of the printed reports. When the summary option is checked, the formulas and substitutions will not be printed out. Thus, this option will generate less paper and more compact reports. When the detailed option is checked, the reports will be the normal length.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-14
Select the units you wish to use when starting a new file. The selected file will be used both for the input and the computed results. Note: This feature cannot be used for changing the units for a currently opened input file. To change units for a currently opened file use the Set Units option discussed later in this section.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-15
Hoops is the third party software used by CodeCalc and PVElite for generating the images on the screen of either the individual components or the 3D model generated in PVElite for the vessel as it is constructed. If your computer does not generate the image correctly on the screen, then switch the choice from the currently set driver.
If you have purchased Nozzle Pro from the Paulin Research Group www.paulin.com http://www., this feature enables you to access Nozzle Pro to perform finite element analysis (FEA) of nozzles. This feature can also be used to perform more accurate and detailed analysis than can be performed using the other local load procedures (WRC107, WRC297 and PD 5500 Annex G).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-16
Double clicking on the unit system of your choice, updates the current file and the output processor to reflect the new units selected. Make Unit Enables the user to create any set of units by opening the Create a New Units File dialog.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-17
CodeCalc (and indeed all of COADE's products) internally use conventional American units. You can also choose some of the unit files supplied with the program. Additionally, you can also make your own unit files using this menu. The conversion factor from CodeCalc to the chosen unit must be known in order that CodeCalc can provide the conversion for the output and on-screen units for the various entry fields. Calculator Use the calculator to compute a number and transfer that number into CodeCalc by using EDIT/COPY. From the desired field, right click and choose the PASTE option. Before pasting, ensure the fields' content is selected.
Allows users to quickly convert a value in one set of units to a value in another set of units
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-18
Enables users to create and edit user-defined material in the CodeCalc material database. Clicking this menu option displays the Material Database Editor:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-19
button. Next enter the material properties under the General and the Stresses button to add another material if desired. When all of the materials have been entered,
click the button to add these materials to the end of the materials supplied in the CodeCalc material database. The material list from the main database can also be imported into this processor. A material from this list can be button to accomplish this task. In addition to adding imported into the user's material database. Use the materials to the ASME Databases, it is also possible to add materials to the PD:5500 database. When the option to edit this database is selected, the Material Database Editor window appears:
To use this processor, click the button. Next enter the Material Name, Yield Strength and other information. Next fill in the table of stress versus temperature sections. This processor creates a user material database that is stored in the CodeCalc\System subdirectory. Once the database has been saved after the initial use, those materials will be available for editing.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-20
Diagnostic Menu
The DIAGNOSTICS MENU helps to troubleshoot problem installations.
Diagnostics Menu
The following options are available: CRC Check - This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied PVElite files. Build Version Check - This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files. DLL Version Check - This option checks to make sure the PVElite.dll files are current. Please note that if the dll's are not current the program could behave in an unusual manner or may not run at all. Error Review - This option allows the user to review errors that may have been generated at startup or during program execution. Register Servers - Register the dynamic link libraries that PVElite uses during its operation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-21
View Menu
The VIEW MENU allows the user to display the input, drawing and quick analysis and browse views.
View Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-22
ESL Menu
The ESL MENU provides access to utilities, which interact with the external software lock.
ESL Menu
The options are as follows: Show Data - Displays the data stored on the ESL. Generate Access Codes - Allows you to generate access codes to update the ESL. These access codes should be sent to COADE to obtain the authorization codes. Enter re-Authorization Codes - Allows you to enter the remote authorization codes received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the data stored on your ESL. Check ESL Driver Status - Checks the version of the installed ESL drivers. Install ESL Device Driver - Installs the ESL device drivers.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-23
Help Menu
The HELP MENU displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support for CodeCalc.
Help Menu
The options available are as follows: Tip of the Day - Provides tips for running CodeCalc. Help Topics - Starts the help facility. View Documentation - Displays the online documentation in PDF format. CodeCalc Quick Start - Displays the CodeCalc Quick Start documentation. This section is primarily for first time users to enable them to get up and running quickly. New Features in this Version - Describes the new features added in the most recent version of the program. On-Line registration - Allows users to electronically register this program with COADE. Once registered users receive email notifications about program updates. Desktop (On-line Help) - Displays the on-line help. About This Program - Provides the user with the latest build information and operating system information. It also contains information on the ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support, and provides some helpful links on COADE's Web Site.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-24
Performing an Analysis
The remainder of this chapter assists you in performing an analysis using the Shell program.
icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs. If you are running Start CodeCalc by clicking the the program through PVElite use the Input option and select COMPONENT ANALYSIS DATA. From the Main Menu click FILE, NEW or click the New icon. This will allow you to specify the current analysis type. From the Analysis Toolbar, select Shells and Heads and then click the displays. icon. A blank input screen
Shell analysis can be defined on the Design tab of this screen. You can use the Tab or Enter keys to move the cursor up and down the column of data. Notice also that many of the fields display default values. The first field on the input screen is the Item Number. A value must be entered in this field or the program cannot perform the analysis. We suggest that you number the different calculations sequentially. Type 1 in this field and press Tab. The next field to analyze is the Description. The information entered can be the part number or a short description of the part. This field is an optional input. For this tutorial, type Spherical Head. The next four fields govern the pressure and temperature. Move to the Design Internal Pressure field and type 100 (assuming you are using English units). Now tab to the Design Temperature for Internal Pressure and type 700. When you press Tab, the program pauses momentarily to check whether the material specified has an allowable stress greater than zero at the temperature entered. Click the button to view the allowable stress. Note that the allowable stress for SA516-70 material is 18,100 psi at this temperature. This is precisely the value that PVElite extracted from the material database. The Design External pressure for this problem is 15. The Design Temperature for External pressure should be 650. Now you are ready to enter the material. Let's say this vessel is constructed of SA-516-70. As you might expect, one way to enter that material is just to type it in the field. When you do so, the program will check the database, and then update the allowable stresses. This material happens to be the program default, but type the name anyway just to see what the program does.
Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this list, click the A screen will display showing the materials list.
button.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-25
You can move the scroll bar up and down the screen to view the properties for all of the materials in the database. Note that each major material classification is divided into columns. You can view the parameters for a specific material by clicking the material name.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-26
These parameters may be viewed and modified through the Material Edit window. To see this window, click the Material Edit button and the Material Properties Dialog displays.
Click Yield Stress to display the Yield Stress Record dialog. The Yield Stress Record dialog enables PVElite to scan the yield stress database for an exact material match and fill in the appropriate yield stress at operating temperature. For many applications, this value is not needed.
On the Joint Efficiency Longitudinal Seams dialog, enter the value of E, the longitudinal joint efficiencies to be used in the calculator. For full radiography, enter a value of 1.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-27
The next question asks if you would like to include Hydrostatic Head Components to our vessel design. Click the box to activate the Hydrostatic Head dialog.
This dialog will prompt you for the operating liquid density enter a value of 38 lb/cu.ft. The next two fields request the height of liquid column in the operating and hydrotest position of the vessel. This particular vessel is a horizontal drum that will be operating in a partially filled position. When the shop hydrotests the vessel it will be filled and in the horizontal position. Enter values of 54 and 72 in. for these two fields. Click OK to return to the Data Input screen. Now click the Geometry tab of the input screen. The first field is the shell or head type. Six options are shown on the pull-down, for more details on this field press [F1] for help. We will analyze a hemispherical head, a cylinder and an elliptical head. These are all components of the horizontal vessel we are analyzing. First enter the Diameter Basis (OD) for an Outside Diameter measurement (and calculation). Next, tab to the Diameter of Shell/Head field and enter the diameter, 72 inches. Now, enter the Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches, and the Nominal or Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches. Enter 0.0625 inches for the Corrosion Allowance. Since the input fields have calculator capability, you can also enter the Corrosion Allowance as '1/16'. For this example there is no reinforcing ring required for internal pressure, so select None for the ring type. You have now completed the hemispherical head input. Your screen should look like this:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-28
Note: You may view the drawing of the current item at any time by clicking the Cactus Picture icon. This horizontal tank has two additional sections, the shell and the elliptical head on the other end. To add the new section, click . Clicking this button returns you to the Design tab of the input screen and prompts you to enter the second item. Type 2 in the Item Number field and Cylinder in the Description field. Click the Geometry tab to enter the shell type. Since this is a cylinder type, from the pull down, select CYLINDRICAL SHELL. A window will display prompting for the Design Length of Section and the Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations; enter 180 inches for both. Click OK to resume. Next, we will enter elliptical head data. Click the Add New Item icon. Type 3 in the Item Number field and Elliptical Head in the Description field. The data from the previous element is carried forward, so you will only have to modify the shell/head type. Click the Geometry tab of the Input screen. From the TYPE OF SHELL pull-down, select Elliptical Head. The Elliptical Head dialog appears and prompts for the head ratio. Enter 2 for a 2:1 elliptical head. Click OK to continue. Tip: When entering new components be sure to type appropriate descriptions in the Description field. This will help make your finished reports more clear and easier to follow. You are now ready to analyze these three components for internal pressure and hydrostatic head considerations. Save the file and click on the Analysis toolbar. Your screen will resemble this:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-29
Analysis Output
Click
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-30
At the moment there are 3 analyses in the output file. However, if you were to do additional runs of the Shell program, or analyze nozzles, flanges, tubesheets, or anything else those analyses would also appear on this list. Thus you can review (and print) all of the calculations you have done for a given vessel or job at one time. The individual report can be viewed by selecting one of the items in the report area. You can scroll up and down in the text to see all of the input and results. Note especially the Summary of Internal Pressure Results, where you can clearly see that the required thickness is less than the actual thickness for this job, while the Maximum allowable working pressure is greater than the design pressure. Therefore, the shell thickness you selected is acceptable.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-31
You may also select more than one analysis at a time by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the items to view. You can also select all reports by selecting EDIT/SELECT ALL from the menu. When viewing the reports, click the Next Report button to move the next component.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-32
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-33
Design Internal Pressure P Temperature for Internal Pressure User Entered Minimum Design Metal Temperature Design External Pressure PEXT Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Operating Liquid Density Height of Liquid Column ( Operating ) Height of Liquid Column ( Hydrotest ) Material Specification (Not Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Head Joint Outside Diameter of Hemispherical Head Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation Type of Element:
S SA E D T T CA
psi psi
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: Spherical Head ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*D/2)/(2*S*E+0.8*P) per Appendix 1-1(a)(2) = (101.19*72.0000/2)/(2*18100.00*1.00+0.8*101.19) = 0.1004 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): Less Operating Hydrostatic Head Pressure of 1.19 psig = (2*S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2-0.8*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(2) = (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(72.0000/2-0.8*(0.4375)) = 444.25 - 1.19 = 443.06 psig
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-34
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (2*SA*E*T)/((D/2-0.8*T) Appendix 1-1 (a)(2) = (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(72.0000/2-0.8*0.5000) = 561.80 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*(D/2-0.8*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA)) = (101.19*(72.0000/2-0.8*(0.4375)))/(2*1.00*(0.4375)) = 4122.67 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.1629 0.5000 443.062 100.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %
Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 636.44 * MAPNC - Head (Hydro) 727.74 * MAWP * Sa/S 539.97 )
Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 75t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: of Shell Component VOLMET of Shell Component WMET Volume of Component VOLID of Water in Component WWAT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA
1.049 -6 F -146 F 4015.2 1136.3 93700.9 3383.6 3519.4 996.0 94196.7 3401.5
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: Spherical Head ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 650.00 25125000.00 F psi in. in. psi psig
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.4375 Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 164.5714 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0015191 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 9327.4229 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 113.35 EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 9327.4229/( 164.5714 / 2 ) = 113.3541 Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA Outside Diameter of Shell OD 0.1113 72.0000
in. in.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-35
Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 647.0902 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0003863 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 4853.4580 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 15.00 EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 4853.4580/( 647.0902 / 2 ) = 15.0009 SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software 113.35 15.00 0.1738 0.5000
psi psig
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-36
PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : Tutorial -------------------------------------- Page 5 Shell Analysis : Cylinder Item: 2 4:39p Dec 12,2002 Input Echo, Component 2, Description: Cylinder 100.00 700.00 -20.00 15.00 650.00 CS-2 YES 38.000 54.00 72.00 SA-516 70 K02700 18100.00 20000.00 B 1.00 180.0000 180.0000 72.0000 0.5000 0.5000 0.0625 NO Cylindrical Shell psig F F psig F
Design Internal Pressure P Temperature for Internal Pressure User Entered Minimum Design Metal Temperature Design External Pressure PEXT Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Operating Liquid Density Height of Liquid Column ( Operating ) Height of Liquid Column ( Hydrotest ) Material Specification (Not Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Shell Joint Design Length of Section Length of Cylinder for Volume Calcs. Outside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation Type of Element:
S SA E L CYLLEN D T T CA
psi psi
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: Cylinder ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*D/2)/(S*E+0.4*P) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1) = (101.19*72.0000/2)/(18100.00*1.00+0.4*101.19) = 0.2008 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): Less Operating Hydrostatic Head Pressure of 1.19 psig = (S*E*(T-CA))/(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1) = (18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(72.0000/2-0.4*0.4375) = 221.04 - 1.19 = 219.85 psig Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (SA*E*T)/(D/2-0.4*T) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-37
= (20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(72.0000/2-0.4*0.5000) = 279.33 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA)) = (101.19*((72.0000/2-0.4*(0.4375)))/(1.00*(0.4375)) = 8285.81 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.2633 0.5000 219.852 100.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %
Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 315.81 * MAPNC - Head (Hydro) 360.53 * MAWP * Sa/S 268.67 )
Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 50t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight WEIGHT Volume Weight Inside Weight and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: of Shell Component VOLMET of Shell Component WMET Volume of Component VOLID of Water in Component WWAT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA
0.699 -6 F -55 F
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: Cylinder ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 650.00 25125000.00 F psi
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.4375 in. Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 in. Design Length of Cylinder or Cone SLEN 180.0000 in. Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 164.5714 Length / Diameter Ratio LD 2.5000 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0002498 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 3138.2285 psi Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 25.43 psig EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 3138.2285 )/( 3 * 164.5714 ) = 25.4255 Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA Outside Diameter of Shell OD 0.3545 72.0000 in. in.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-38
Design Length of Cylinder or Cone SLEN 180.0000 in. Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 203.1269 Length / Diameter Ratio LD 2.5000 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0001819 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 2285.3257 psi Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 15.00 psig EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 2285.3257 )/( 3 * 203.1269 ) = 15.0010 Results for Maximum Length Between Stiffeners (Slen): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.4375 in. Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 in. Design Length of Cylinder or Cone SLEN 303.3275 in. Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 164.5714 Length / Diameter Ratio LD 4.2129 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0001474 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 1851.5686 psi Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 15.00 psig EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 1851.5686 )/( 3 * 164.5714 ) = 15.0011 SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure Actual Length as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software 25.43 15.00 0.4170 0.5000 303.327 180.00 psig psig in. in. in. in.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-39
PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock FileName : Tutorial -------------------------------------- Page 8 Shell Analysis : Ellipse Item: 3 4:39p Dec 12,2002 Input Echo, Component 3, Description: Ellipse 100.00 700.00 -20.00 15.00 650.00 CS-2 YES 38.000 54.00 72.00 SA-516 70 K02700 18100.00 20000.00 B 1.00 72.0000 0.5000 0.5000 0.0625 2.0000 2.0000 NO Elliptical Head psig F F psig F
Design Internal Pressure P Temperature for Internal Pressure User Entered Minimum Design Metal Temperature Design External Pressure PEXT Temperature for External Pressure External Pressure Chart Name Include Hydrostatic Head Components Operating Liquid Density Height of Liquid Column ( Operating ) Height of Liquid Column ( Hydrotest ) Material Specification (Not Normalized) Material UNS Number Allowable Stress At Temperature Allowable Stress At Ambient Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 Joint efficiency for Head Joint Outside Diameter of Elliptical Head Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate Corrosion Allowance Aspect Ratio Length of Straight Flange
S SA E D T T CA
psi psi
AR STRTFLG
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: Ellipse ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR): = (P*D*K)/(2*S*E+2*P*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (101.19*72.0000*1.00)/(2*18100.00*1.00+2*101.19*(1.00-0.1)) = 0.2002 in. Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP): Less Operating Hydrostatic Head Pressure of 1.19 psig = (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*D-2*(T-CA)*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(1.00*72.0000-2*(0.4375)*(1.00-0.1)) = 222.40 - 1.19 = 221.21 psig
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-40
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC): = (2*SA*E*T)/(K*D-2*T*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c) = (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(1.00*72.0000-2*0.5000*(1.00-0.1)) = 281.29 psig Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact): = (P*(K*D-2*(T-CA)*(K-0.1)))/(2*E*(T-CA)) = (101.19*(1.00*72.0000-2*(0.4375)*(1.00-0.1)))/(2*1.00*(0.4375)) = 8235.22 psi SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca Actual Thickness as Given in Input Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Design Pressure as Given in Input P HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 0.2627 0.5000 221.210 100.000 in. in. psig psig psig psig psig %
Measured at High Point ): * MAWP * Sa/S 317.76 * MAPNC - Head (Hydro) 363.08 * MAWP * Sa/S 270.32 )
Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 75t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) WEIGHT and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS: Volume of Shell Component VOLMET Weight of Shell Component WMET Inside Volume of Component VOLID Weight of Water in Component WWAT Inside Vol. of 2.00 in. Straight VOLSCA Total Volume for Head + Straight VOLTOT WEIGHT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS: Volume of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA Weight of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA Inside Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA Weight of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA Inside Vol. of 2.00 in. Straight, Corr. VOLSCA Total Volume for Head + Straight Corroded VOLTCA
3.085 -6 F -55 F 3283.9 929.4 46850.4 1691.8 7918.4 54768.8 2873.4 813.2 47098.3 1700.8 7946.3 55044.6
in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb. in.**3 in.**3 in.**3 lb. in.**3 lb. in.**3 in.**3
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: Ellipse ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02 External Pressure Chart CS-2 Elastic Modulus for Material at 650.00 25125000.00 F psi
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp): Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.4375 in. Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 in. Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 164.5714 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0008439 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 8167.3354 psi Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 55.14 psig EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 8167.3354/( 0.9000 * 164.5714 ) = 55.1421 Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca):
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10-41
Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.2003 in. Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 in. Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 359.4879 Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0003864 Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 4853.5474 psi Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 15.00 psig EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 4853.5474/( 0.9000 * 359.4879 ) = 15.0014 SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS: Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness Required Pressure as entered by User Required Thickness including Corrosion all. Actual Thickness as entered by User PVElite by COADE Engineering Software 55.14 15.00 0.2628 0.5000 psig psig in. in.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-2
SHELLS
Introduction
SHELLS performs internal and external pressure design of vessel and exchanger components using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Edition 2004 A-05. This program considers static liquid head in the pressure design, performs stiffening ring calculations, sizes stiffening rings, and computes weld shear flows on stiffening ring welds. Jackets can be attached to the vessel and are analyzed per Appendix 9 of ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code. This module also contains information for performing fitness for service evaluation per API-579.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-3
ID Basis
UG-27 (c) (1) App 1-4 (c) (1), App 1-4 (f) App 1-4 (d) (3), App 1-4 (f) UG-27 (d) (3) UG-32 (g) UG-34 (1)and (3)
OD Basis
App 1-1 (a) (1) App 1-4 (c) (2), App 1-4 (f) App 1-4 (d) (4), App 1-4 (f) App 1-1 (a) (2) App 1-4 (e) (1)
Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed. Torispherical heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be analyzed. The thin, large diameter elliptical or torispherical head is also checked using App. 1-4 (f) in the SHELL program. Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the CONICAL program. Welded flat heads, circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this program. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the FLANGE program. Bolted dished heads under internal or external pressure are analyzed in the FLOHEAD program. Under external pressure program analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applicable code formulae as follows:
Code Paragraph
UG-28 (c) UG-33 (d) UG-33 (e) UG-33 (c) and UG-28 (d) UG-33 (f)
All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than 10. Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed Torispherical heads with any crown radius may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of conical heads or sections is analyzed in the CONICAL program. The SHELL program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition. Figure A shows the geometry for the SHELL program. In addition, the SHELL program also accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be used for UCS-66 calculations.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-4
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-6
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-7
Diameter Basis
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For flat heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-8
SHELLS
If this material is not a carbon steel then enter a 0 in this field. If a value of zero is entered, the program will not echo this value out during runtime.
Is Jacket Present
Check this box if a jacket is present. The program will analyze jackets per Appendix-9 of the ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1. For more information refer to the discussion about the jackets (see "Jacket" on page 11-29).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-9
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Head welded to vessel with generous radius Head welded to vessel with small radius Lap welded or brazed construction Integral flat circular heads Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m) Plate welded to end of shell Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment) Plate held in place by screwed ring Bolted flat head with full face gasket Plate screwed into small diameter vessel Plate held in place by beveled edge
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-10
SHELLS
Enter the width of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is the dimension that is perpendicular to the surface of the shell. See the figure on the next page.
Equal Leg Angles Unequal Angle Double Angles Large Legs back to back Double Angles Small Legs back to back Channel Sections Wide Flange Sections Wide Flange Sections ( T type ) Miscellaneous Tee Structural Tee Miscellaneous Channel
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-11
This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for the computation of the maximum spacing between weld segments.
Attached to the inside of the Shell On the outer surface of the Shell
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-12
SHELLS
Results
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure
The appropriate formula from ASME Section VIII is referenced, and the formula and substitutions are shown. The diameter or crown radius is adjusted to take into account the corrosion allowance. If your shell design includes hydrostatic head components, the additional pressure due to the height of the liquid column and the operating liquid density will be included with the basic design pressure. The hydrostatic head will be subtracted in order to properly determine the MAWP for the vessel part that is being analyzed. Remember, when pressures are being read from the pressure gauge, the gauge is usually at the high point of the vessel. The pressure registered by the gauge would be different if were at the bottom of the liquid filled vessel. For elliptical heads, the K factor is (2 + Ar * Ar) / 6, per App. 1-4 (c). For torispherical heads the factor M is (1/4) * (3 + SQRT (L / R)), where "L" (the crown radius) and "R" (the knuckle radius) were entered by the user. PVElite does not replace the given thickness with this calculated minimum. If you are choosing the thickness for a component, compare the values shown under "Summary of Internal Pressure Results" (required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up or down accordingly.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-13
For the UG99-C hydrotest, the liquid head is subtracted from the basic result.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-14
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-16
SHELLS
For most evaluations, it is recommended to first perform the assessment using Section 4, then perform Section 5 if necessary. The rules in Section 4 have been structured to provide consistent results with Section 5. However, it is the responsibility of the user to review the Assessment Applicability and Limitation whenever the assessment changes. API 579 Section 4 limitations for Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are as follows: The original design is in accordance with a recognized code or standard. The component is not operating in the creep range. The region of metal loss has relatively smooth contours without notches. The component is not in cyclic service (less than 150 total cycles). The component under evaluation does not contain crack-like flaws. The component under evaluation has a design equation, which specifically relates pressure and/or other loads, as applicable, to a required wall thickness. With some exception, the following specific components do not have equations relating pressure and/or other loads to a required wall thickness may be evaluated using Level 2 assessments: Pressure vessel nozzles and piping branch connections. Cylinder to flat head junctions. Integral tubesheet connections Flanges Piping systems. Note: Currently CodeCalc does not support API 579 analysis on nozzle, flange, tubesheet, flathead, and piping system components. The following limitations on applied loads are satisfied
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-17
Level 1 assessment - Components are subject to internal and/or external pressure (negligible supplemental loads). Level 2 assessment - Components are subject to internal and/or external pressure and/or supplemental loads such as weight, wind and earthquake. Limitations for API 579 Section 5 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are similar to the limitations for Section 4 with the following additions: The components cannot be subjected to external pressure, or if the flaw is located in the knuckle region of elliptical head (outside of the 0.8D region), torispherical/toriconical head, or conical transition. The material component is considered to have sufficient material toughness. Special provisions are provided for groove-like flaws such as: Groove (no mechanical cold work). Gouge (mechanical cold work). For more details, refer to Section 4 and Section 5 in the API Recommended Practice 579. Section 6 covers flaw assessment procedures for components that are subjected to pitting damages as described below: Widespread Pitting. Localized Pitting. Region of Local Metal Loss Located in an Area of Widespread Pitting. Pitting Confined within a Region of Localized Metal Loss. Pitting damage can occur on the inside, outside, or both sides of the component surfaces. For components with pittings on both surfaces, be sure to indicate the location of each pit-couple in the data entry table. Pitting damage is described using pit-couples, each is composed of two pits that are separated by a solid ligament. The procedure for determining pit-couples is described in the API 579 paragraph 6.3.3.3. A representative number of pit couples measurements in the damage area should be used. If the pit flaw is uniform then a minimum of 10 pit-couple measurements should be used. For non-uniform pit flaw, additional pit-couple measurements are required. CodeCalc can analyze up to 36 pit-couples measurements. The limitations for API 579 Section 6 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are similar to the limitations for Section 5 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments. For more details refer to API RP 579 Section 6 .
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-18
SHELLS
Flaw Type
Assessment of General Metal Loss Assessment of Local Metal Loss Assessment of Pitting Corrosion
Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 4 analysis Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 5 analysis Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 6 analysis
Note: It is the responsibility of the user to review the Assessment Applicability and Limitations whenever the assessment is changed.
Flaw Location
Select the location of the flaw:
Inside Outside Inside and Outside
Located on the ID surface Located on the OD surface Located on both ID and OD surfaces (used in Section 6 for Multiple Layer Analysis)
None User specified Near a stiffening ring Skirt weld seam Cone weld seam
Formed Heads
Cone
None User specified Near the large end or the small end junction
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-19
User Specified, Lv
Enter the user specified zone thickness averaging length, Lv. The entered value will override the calculated value described in API 579. A blank in the input box is interpreted as a zero value. For more details refer to Figure E.
Pitting Type
Select the type of pitting damage: Widespread Pitting - Pitting occurs over a significant region of the component Localized Pitting - Pitting occurs over a localized region of the component LTA Region Located in Widespread Pitting Area - A region of LTA is located in an area of widespread pitting Pitting Confined in Region of Localized Metal Loss - Pitting which confined within LTA
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-20
SHELLS
LTA Dimensions
Enter the s and c dimensions. These dimensions are required for the following pitting damage types: Localized pitting Region of LTA located in an area of widespread pitting Pitting confined within a region of localized metal loss For more details refer to Figure F.
LMSD
Enter the shortest distance from the edge of the local metal loss region under investigation to the nearest major structural discontinuity such as a weld seam and/or a stiffening ring. This parameter will be used to check the limiting flaw size in the Section 5 analysis.
Point
Check this box if the Point Thickness measurement method is used.
Profile
Check this box if the Profile Thickness measurement method is used.
Groove
Check this box if a groove is present.
Pitting
Check this box for analyzing pitting flaw.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-21
Beta
Enter the groove orientation in degrees. For more details refer to Figure G - Groove Description.
P_k
Enter the pit-couple spacing in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
Theta_k
Enter the pit-couple orientation in degree. For more details refer to Figure H.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-22
SHELLS
d_i,k
Enter the diameter of the pit i in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
d_j,k
Enter the diameter of the pit j in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
w_i,k
Enter the depth of the pit i in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
w_j,k
Enter the depth of the pit j in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
Pitting Location
Enter the pit-couple location on the element. This pit-couple location is required when the pit damage located on both sides of the component. Enter 1 for pit-couple is located on the ID surface Enter 2 for pit-couple is located on the OD surface
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-23
Profile Type
Select the profile thickness measurement data type, CTP (Critical Thickness Profile) or Grid type (raw data). The selection will set the data entry table accordingly.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-24
SHELLS
Supplemental Loads
Enable this check box for supplemental loads inputs
Axial Force, F
Enter the net-section axial force from supplemental loads excluding the pressure trust for the Sustained and Expansion Cases if any. For more details refer to Figure I below for the directional convention.
Shear Force, V
Enter the net-section shear force from the supplemental loads for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Bending Moment, Mx
Enter the component of the net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the X direction for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Bending Moment, My
Enter the component of net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the Y direction for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Bending Moment, Mz
Enter the net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the Z direction for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-25
Shell Orientation
Select the orientation of the installed vessel. This input will be used to get the horizontal input data for the thickness calculation due to supplemental loads.
Depth of Head
Enter the head depth of the horizontal vessel. For more details refer to Figure J.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-26
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-27
Discussion of Results
An effort has been made to use the same variable names and reporting formats as are used in the API Recommended Practice 579 book. A summary at the end of the analysis of each level will be written. Depending on the pass or fail criteria, either the remaining life using the thickness (or MAWP) approach will be computed or a de-rating MAWP will be printed. As suggested in the API Recommended Practice 579 book, the following, or combinations thereof can be considered when the component does not meet the Level 2 Assessment requirements: Re-rate, repair and retire the component. Adjust the FCA by applying remediation techniques Adjust the weld joint efficiency factor, E, by conducting additional examinations and repeat the assessment Conduct a Level 3 assessment.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-28
SHELLS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-29
Jacket
PVElite will compute the required thickness of the jacket, closure bar and the internal chamber (cylindrical / conical shell, or head covered by the jacket). The code gives weld sizes, which must be adhered to, as they are designed to ensure full integrity of the jacket attachment to the vessel. ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix 9 sets out 5 basic jacket configurations. For more information refer in the code to Figure 9-2.
In a type 3 jacket arrangement, there is no closure bar, however the welding is critical, and the notes set out in the code must be adhered to. Typically, the jacket is attached by means of a closure bar as shown here:
The closure bar can be a simple rectangular section ring as displayed above, or it can be more elaborate as displayed in Appendix 9 of the code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-30
SHELLS
Note: Verify the inner shell/head for external pressure using (any) vacuum plus the Jacket Pressure and consider the Design Length of the Jacket section L.
Jacket Type
From the list box select the Jacket Type you are analyzing. For more information refer to the types above. If you cannot decide what type most suits your model, then enter Type 2. If this is not appropriate, then the program will give you a warning message.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-31
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-32
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-33
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-34
SHELLS
Value
1.00 0.85 0.70
Result
Full Radiography Spot Radiography No Radiography
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 11 SHELLS
11-35
Corrosion Allowances
Enter the following corrosion allowances. The program will perform all the calculations in the corroded condition.
1 2 3 Inner shell corrosion allowance outside Jacket corrosion allowance inside Jacket head corrosion allowance inside cso cji ci
Note that the input for the inner shell corrosion allowance inside is available on the 'Geometry' tab of the main input screen.
Jacket Material
Select the jacket material.
Jacket Pressure Pj
Enter the pressure in the jacket space. This is the pressure shown in the figure L.
Jacket Thickness tj
Enter the thickness of the jacket as shown in figure L.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11-36
SHELLS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-2
NOZZLES
Introduction
NOZZLES calculates required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs failure path calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. The program also enables the user to orientate the nozzle in various directions such as hillside, lateral and radial.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-3
Component
Cylinder Elliptical Head Torispherical Head Spherical Head or Shell Conical
Paragraph
UG-27 (c) (1) UG-32 (d) (1) UG-32 (e) (1) UG-27 (d) (3) UG-27 (g)
The program evaluates nozzles at any reasonable angle from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle, hillside or tangential nozzles. NOZZLE takes full account of the internal corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition. NOZZLE also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-4
NOZZLES
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-5
allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D. If using a module where PD:5500 is selected as design code, then the program will use the PD:5500 Material Database.
Shell Diameter
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the diameter of the cone at the point where the nozzle intersects the shell.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-6
NOZZLES
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-7
If your geometry meets this criteria and this check box is NOT checked, then no area of reinforcement calculations will be performed on this nozzle item.
Note that if you are using Metric or non-English units, then the diameter when converted must end up as a value in the table above. For example if the size were 10 inch nominal, this would correspond to 254 mm. In the nozzle dialog, press the button next to the pipe size to select it from the list. In the list, both the ANSI nominal and Metric Nominal are shown.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-8
NOZZLES Actual: The program uses the actual diameter entered in the field above and the actual thickness entered in the field below. Nominal: The program looks up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the field above, and looks up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the second field below. Minimum: The program looks up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the field above, and looks up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the second field below. It then multiplies the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-9
vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted. Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert and abutting nozzles.
Reinforcing Pad
If there is a reinforcing pad on the nozzle, or if you wish to specify the geometry for a reinforcing pad, check this field. NOTE CAREFULLY that though PVElite will design and recommend a reinforcing pad if one is needed, the analysis of areas is based only on what you have entered. If PVElite recommends a pad or a larger pad than the one you enter, you must go back into input and enter a pad of the correct size in order for the final configuration to be reflected in the final analysis.
Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area requirements in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases PVElite automatically checks the area requirements in both the planes, using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle opening. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one half of the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and conical sections. One hill-side nozzle example based on ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix L-7.7 is illustrated in the file checks under the PVElite examples directory Nozzles item #10 and 11. Some examples are shown in Figure C.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-10
NOZZLES
Y-angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections, by clicking on the Is Lateral .. check box. In this case only the vessel-nozzle centerline angle needs to be specified. The following Figure D and Figure E show examples of typical Y-angle nozzles.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-11
When analyzing a conical head enter the axial length of the cone. If you are analyzing any other head types, enter a 0 here. You must also enter the required thickness of the component in the appropriate field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-12
NOZZLES
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-13
nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero, respectively, in this field.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into account for the pad thickness.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-14
NOZZLES
Discussion of Results
Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness
If you specified an 'actual' basis for nozzle diameter and thickness, the diameter and thickness shown will be the same as those which you entered. If you specified 'Nominal', these values will be the nominal diameter and thickness found in the programs pipe size tables. If you entered minimum the program will have looked up the diameter and thickness in the pipe size tables and then multiplied the thickness by 0.875.
The joint efficiency used in this calculation is always 1.0. In 1989 we submitted a request for interpretation to the ASME Code in order to show that the use of 1.0 under all circumstances was justified. The reply was published in the A-90 addenda as Interpretation VIII-1-89-171. The question and reply were as follows: Question: In reinforcement calculations, is the joint efficiency used in calculating the required thickness of the vessel wall tr and the required thickness of the wall trn 1.0 regardless of the joint efficiency determined for the vessel wall and nozzle wall from the rules in UW-12, provided the nozzle does not pass through a weld? Reply: Yes. Note also that the program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12-16
NOZZLES
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 12 NOZZLES
12-17
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-2
FLANGES
Introduction
FLANGE calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the Edition 2004 A-05.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-3
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., counterclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe. 5 Calculate the hub factors and other geometry factors for the flange based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4). The factors are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5, and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consistently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix. These formulae are implemented in the flange program. Calculate the stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and the flange thickness. Calculate the flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material. S = k(geometry) * M / t2 That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub. The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given in "Modern Flange Design", Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge.
6 7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-4
FLANGES
The FLANGE program includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed by a mating flange. The program also takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter uncorroded thicknesses and diameters, which the program adjusts before performing the calculations. The program can treat corrosion in a special manner based on the input of a Yes/No question in the input. The program can also be used for two levels of flange design. The PARTIAL option forces the program to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The DESIGN option forces the program to select all of the relevant flange geometry including bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter, thickness, and hub geometry.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-5
Flange Designation
Enter an alphanumeric tag for this flange. When performing a partial analysis, PVElite iterates for the required thickness of the flange. The final set of results you see is made using the final required thickness. If you would like to see the results using the input thickness, then enter a colon ":" as any character in the description. In both cases, PVElite will determine the required thickness. This entry is optional.
Flange Type
Enter the flange type number for this flange. Flange types are: Integral Weld Neck Integral Slip On Integral Ring Loose Slip On Loose Ring Lap Joint Blind Reverse There are essentially only two categories of flanges for the purposes of analysis. These are integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-6
FLANGES
Weld Neck Flanges - These have a hub that is butt welded to the vessel. Slip-on Flanges - These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral type flanges they require a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel. Ring Flanges - These do no have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange. They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is used between the flange and the vessel. Lap Joint Flanges - These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected from the vessel, bearing only on a vessel 'lap'. They are always analyzed as loose. Reverse Geometry Flange - Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use integral flange rules, which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See Appendix 2-13. Loose Type Flanges - Especially lap joints, may be split. A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in the other. Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets - A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included in the Code sketches, or in the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that extends from the ID of the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of flange are usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation sheets.
Analysis Type
Enter the analysis type for the computations to be performed on this flange. Analyze - For this analysis type, users must give the complete flange definition. The program will compute the resulting stresses. Partial - For this analysis type, all information except for the flange thickness must be specified. The program will select a flange thickness such that the resulting flange stress equals the allowable stress. Design - For this analysis type, only the flange diameter and thickness, gasket and flange face geometry, and gasket properties are specified. The program computes all other flange dimensions and stresses.
Design Pressure
Enter the internal design pressure. If the value entered in this field is negative, it will be treated as external pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for the flange. This temperature will be used to interpolate the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-7
Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. You can also create new materials by selecting the TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS option on the MAIN MENU.
CAUTION: You should verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
CAUTION: You should verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Flange Thickness
Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted from the flange and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the computations.
Flange ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the inner pipe diameter. This value is refereed to as "B" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user. For a blind flange this entry should be 0.
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is refereed to as "A" in the ASME code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-8
FLANGES
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is refereed to as "h" in the ASME code. For flange geometries without hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When you analyze a flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However, when you design as a loose flange a ring flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the program designs the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the nuts.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-9
Thread Series
The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-10
FLANGES
Facing Column
II
Flat Elastomers Below 75A Shore Durometer 75A Shore Durometer or higher 0.50 1.00 0 200 II II
Flat asbestos with suitable binder 1/8 inch thick 1/16 inch thick 1/32 inch thick 2.00 2.75 3.50 1600 3700 6500 II II II
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert 3 ply 2 ply 1 ply Vegetable Fiber
1.25
400
II
II II II II
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled Carbon Steel Stainless Steel or Monel 2.50 3.00 10000 10000 II II
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 2900 3700 4500 5500 6500 II II II II II
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-11
Gasket Material
Gasket Factor m
Seating Stress y
Facing Column
Corrugated metal, not filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 3700 4500 5500 6500 7600 II II II II II
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75 5500 6500 7600 8000 9000 9000 II II II II II II
Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25 5500 6500 7600 9000 10100 II II II II II
Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50 8800 13000 18000 21800 26000 I I I I I
Ring Joint
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-12
FLANGES
Gasket Material
Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel
Gasket Factor m
5.50 6.00 6.50
Seating Stress y
18000 21800 26000
Facing Column
I I I
DESCRIPTION
flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d (PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-13
Program Selects: Instructs the program to automatically make the determination if this is a full face gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. See the figure below.
Full Face Gasket: Indicates to the program that this is a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. See the figure below:
Not a Full Face: Indicates to the program that this is not a full face gasket flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-14
FLANGES
Peq = Pdes + 4 * F / 3.14 G2 + 16 * M / 3.14 * G3 Where: Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi Pdes = Design pressure, psi F = Axial force, lbs M = Bending moment, in-lbs G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in. The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
WARNING: The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will result in incorrect MAWP calculations. You probably don't want to calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values, but rather based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure. Also you definitely don't want to do "design" when you have a mating flange, since the program selects a different bolt circle, etc. than the one chosen for the other flange. You can however, do a partial thickness design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-16
FLANGES
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-17
Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force, which acts, on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment, which acts, on this flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-18
FLANGES
Discussion of Results
Flanges with Different Bending Moments:
The flange design moments differ from the norm for external pressure, reverse flanges, and flat flanges. Under external pressure only the end load and flange pressure are included in the design, and their sense is reversed. For reverse flanges all the moments are present, but the moment arm hd is negative, making MD negative. The load HT is negative, and the moment arm ht may be either positive or negative. The absolute value of the moment is used in the calculations. For flat faced flanges an alternate value of hg (h''g) is used to calculate a reverse moment at the bolt circle. No calculations for seating conditions for full faced flanges are required.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-19
Ambient
1.5 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sba 1.0 x Sfa 1.0 x Sfa
ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at operating temperature. ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature. ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature. ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at ambient temperature.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-20
FLANGES
1. For Operating Pressure MAWP The program calculates the stresses at the pressure given by the user. The program calculates the slope between the stress at zero pressure and the stress at the given pressure The program extrapolates the slope out to the point where the stress is equal to the allowable stress. The pressure at this point is the maximum allowable working pressure. 2. For Gasket Seating MAWP Note that at low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design pressure. At higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP can be calculated as described above, except that the extrapolation is from the point where pressure comes into the calculation of the seating stress. The program calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on the input geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the input pressure. However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the MAWP may depend on the pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please note that in Partial or Design mode, the program will calculate MAWP based on the required flange thickness.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 13 FLANGES
13-21
Flange Design
The geometry defined by the user is the basis for the design performed by the program. Specifically, the inside diameter, materials, pressure, gasket geometry and gasket properties remain fixed throughout the design. Beginning from this point, the program uses the following approach to design the rest of the flange: 1 2 For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the thickness required for the design pressure For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as the small end of the hub plus 1/16th (for small end thickness less than one inch) or 1/8th (for small end thickness greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub length equal to the small end thickness plus the minimum slope (3:1) for the hub. The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared with standardized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diameters (of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light. Finally, the selection of a small hub keeps the amount of machining required for the flange to a minimum. Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diameter of the flange. The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts than would be found on standard flanges. This also has the effect of minimizing the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange. Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts. Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on:
4 5
The area required divided by the area available per bolt -ORThe maximum allowed spacing between bolts of this size. 6 Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle based on: The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -ORThe OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -ORThe minimum spacing distance between the bolts -ORFor reverse flanges, the vessel OD plus the bolt ID spacing. 7 8 9 Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the minimum edge spacing for the bolt size chosen. For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for the values chosen, and recalculate the moment arms for the flange. Finally (and this step also applies to partial design of the flange), select a thickness for the flange and calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allowable, adjust the thickness based on the difference between the actual and allowable stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. This process continues until the actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable stress.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
13-22
FLANGES
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-2
CONICAL SECTIONS
Introduction
CONICAL SECTIONS performs internal and external pressure design of conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, Edition 2004 A-05.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-4
CONICAL SECTIONS
Cone Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-5
materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-6
CONICAL SECTIONS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-7
NONE BAR SECTION KNUCKLE KNUCKLE and BAR RING KNUCKLE and SECTION
= no reinforcement at the small end and no knuckle. = reinforcing bar at small end (width and thickness). = reinforcing beam section at small end (inertia, area, and depth of beam). = toroidal knuckle at small end ( radius and thickness ). = toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing bar at small end. = toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing beam section at small end.
Note that whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material. If there is no reinforcing material, enter the small end shell material. The values for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia calculations depending on the value of Delta.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-8
CONICAL SECTIONS
NONE BAR SECTION KNUCKLE KNUCKLE and BAR RING KNUCKLE and SECTION
= = = = = =
no reinforcement at the large end and no knuckle. reinforcing bar at large end (width and thickness). reinforcing beam section at large end (inertia, area, and depth of beam). toroidal knuckle at large end ( radius and thickness ). toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing bar at large end. toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing beam section at large end.
Note that whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material. If there is no reinforcing material, enter the large end shell material. The values for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia calculations depending on the value of Delta.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-10
CONICAL SECTIONS
Discussion of Results
Internal Pressure Results
The first section of results shows the required thicknesses and Maximum Allowable Working Pressures for the cone and for the upper and lower cylinders under internal pressure. Note that this section is shown even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum Allowable Working Pressures will be meaningful. Next the program summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allowances as necessary.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-11
PVElite will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the allowed apex angle is higher than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is greater than the area required.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
14-12
CONICAL SECTIONS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-2
FLOATING HEADS
Introduction
FLOATING HEADS performs internal and external pressure design of spherically dished covers (bolted heads) using ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules Edition 2004 A-05.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-4
FLOATING HEADS
Type d is the most common type of head used for heat exchanger floating heads.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature will be used to interpolate the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-5
the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS,/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-6
FLOATING HEADS
Thread Series
The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Note: Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. Note that the number of bolts is almost always a multiple of 4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-7
Program Selects: Instructs the program to automatically make the determination if this is a full face gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. For more information refer to Figure B.
Full Face Gasket: Indicates to the program that this is a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. For more information refer to Figure C.
Figure C - Other Full-Face Gasket Flanges That Require Users Indicate Full-Face Flange.
Not a Full Face: Indicates to the program that this is not a full face gasket flange
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-8
FLOATING HEADS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-9
Facing Column
II
Flat Elastomers Below 75A Shore Durometer 75A Shore Durometer or higher 0.50 1.00 0 200 II II
Flat asbestos with suitable binder 1/8 inch thick 1/16 inch thick 1/32 inch thick 2.00 2.75 3.50 1600 3700 6500 II II II
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert 3 ply 2 ply 1 ply Vegetable Fiber
1.25
400
II
II II II II
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled Carbon Steel Stainless Steel or Monel 2.50 3.00 10000 10000 II II
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 2900 3700 4500 5500 6500 II II II II II
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-10
FLOATING HEADS
Gasket Material
Gasket Factor m
Seating Stress y
Facing Column
Corrugated metal, not filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 3700 4500 5500 6500 7600 II II II II II
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75 5500 6500 7600 8000 9000 9000 II II II II II II
Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25 5500 6500 7600 9000 10100 II II II II II
Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50 8800 13000 18000 21800 26000 I I I I I
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-11
Gasket Material
Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel
Gasket Factor m
6.00 6.50
Seating Stress y
21800 26000
Facing Column
I I
DESCRIPTION
flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-12
FLOATING HEADS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-14
FLOATING HEADS
Discussion of Results
Internal Pressure Results for the Head:
The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the head under internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads: t=5PL/6S The program solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working pressure, and actual stress, and displays the results. Note that these results are also displayed in the thickness summary at the end of the printout.
Soehren's Calculations:
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-15
These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between the flange ring and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis, which takes this into account may be used if it meets the requirements of U-2. The analysis referred to in this paragraph is Soehren's calculation, based on the paper "The Design of Floating heads for Heat-Exchangers", ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate results and calculated stresses are shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not shown in the printout, but bending stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress, while membrane stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
15-16
FLOATING HEADS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-2
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Introduction
This chapter discusses the HORIZONTAL VESSEL module of PVElite. To use the HORIZONTAL VESSEL module from the Main Menu click ANALYSIS/CHOOSE ANALYSIS TYPE/HORIZONTAL VESSELS. This module computes stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by the combination of internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings. If included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE98/02,95 93, UBC-97/94, IBC 2003 and earthquake will be included. The program is based on "Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports", The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and subsequent interpretations of that work. This is also termed Zick's Analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-3
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Item Number
Enter the vessel number for this analysis. This number can be up to 15 digits in length.
Vessel Description
Any combination up to 15 letters and numbers can be used to briefly identify the vessel that is being analyzed. This description is reflected in the output reports and is used in error checking.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the allowance given for corrosion in this field. The corrosion allowance cannot be greater than the vessel wall thickness. In addition, it must not be less than 0 .
Material Specification
Enter the material specification for the shell section of the horizontal vessel. An example of a material type is SA516 70. Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting TOOLS, EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-4
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Extra Weight
Enter any additional weight present on the vessel. Additional weight may come from insulation, steel structures or piping loads. There is no on screen range checking for this entry since it may be positive or negative. However, if negative, this entry should not be greater than the total weight of the vessel.
Figure A - End view of a horizontal vessel with a transverse load, simulating Wind/Seismic loading.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-5
The saddle reaction load Fst (or Fwt for wind) due to the transverse load Ft is: Fst (or Fwt) = ftr * Ft * B / E
Merge Shell
Click on this button to import the Shell information from this CodeCalc file.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-6
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Shell Diameter
Enter the shell diameter with respect to the shell and head diameter basis. The diameter must be greater than 0 and greater than 2.0 times the wall thickness.
Shell Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the shell in this cell. PVElite will automatically corrode the wall thickness as necessary.
Head Type
Select the type of head that is used on the vessel ends. If a flat head is selected then it is assumed to be round and the same diameter as the shell. Following types are available. Elliptical Torispherical Hemispherical Flat
Head Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the head. The value must be greater than 0.0. Effects of corrosion are handled automatically.
Saddle Width
Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact the vessel.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-7
Number of Ribs
Enter the number of ribs in your design. This number should include the outside ribs.
Thickness of Ribs
Enter the thickness of the ribs. The ribs run in a direction that is parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Any external corrosion allowance should be taken into account when this value is entered.
Thickness of Web
Enter the thickness of the Webs. The webs run in a direction perpendicular to the long axis of the vessel. Any external corrosion should be taken into account when this value is entered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-8
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, platforms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the input diameter known.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-9
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value of the importance factor that you wish the program to use. The importance factor accounts for the degree of hazard to life and property. Please note the program will use this value directly without modification. Values of typical importance factors are listed below for ASCE 7-93, ASCE 7-95/98/02 and UBC 1997 standards. ASCE7-93: Following values are used for ASCE 7-93. In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11.: Category
I II III IV
At Oceanline
1.05 1.11 1.11 1.00
Category Classification:
I II III IV buildings and structures not listed below buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc. buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure
Note that most petrochemical structures are 1, Importance I. ASCE-7-95/98/02: In general this value ranges from .77 to 1.15. It is taken from table 6-2 of the ASCE 95 standard or table 6-1 from the 98 standard.
Category
I II III IV
In the 98 standard for Wind Speeds > 100 mph for category I, the importance factor can be 0.77. Category Classification:
I II III IV buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the event of failure buildings and structures except those listed in categories I, III and IV buildings and structures that represent a substantial hazard in the event of a failure buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-10
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
UBC: For UBC 1997 code these values are listed as follows:
Category
I, Essential facilities II, Hazardous facilities III, Special occupancy structures IV, Standard occupancy structures
Wind Exposure
This category reflects the characteristics of ground surface irregularities for the site at which the structure is to be constructed. Use the table below to determine the appropriate exposure category For ASCE codes, the exposure categories are as follows
Exposure Category
A B C D
Description
Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 feet. Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings. Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands. Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large bodies of water.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-11
Description
Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site. Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from the site in any full quadrant. The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 16-G.
Types of Hill
Enter the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details. None 2-D Ridge 2-D Escarpment 3-D Axisymmetric Hill
Seismic Zone
Select the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in ASCE #7 and reproduced below. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. An Identifier of 5( zone 4) will produce the highest saddle load reactions. These values are derived from UBC. The basic equation for lateral G force is :
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-12
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Cs = Z I C / Rw : Rw = 3, C = 2.75, I = 1.0
Seismic Zone
0 1 2a 2b 3 4
Cs
0.0 0.069 0.138 0.184 0.275 0.367
Figure B - Seismic risk map of United States from the ASCE code
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-13
Zone
0 1 2a 2b 3 4
Cs
0.0 0.069 0.138 0.184 0.275 0.367
Friction Factor mu
0.45
Steel-to-Steel
0.40
Lubrite-to-Steel Temperature over 500 F Temperature 500 F or less Bearing pressure less than 500 psi 0.15 0.10 0.15
Teflon-to-Teflon Bearing pressure 800 psi or more Bearing pressure 300 psi or less 0.06 0.1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-14
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-16
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Discussion of Results
PVElite will determine the volume of the vessel as well as the empty and full weights. These weights are computed with the vessel in the corroded condition. Knowing the weights may be useful for cost estimating and for design of supporting attachments, such as lifting lugs. The longitudinal stresses displayed in the output include the stresses due to internal pressure. Since these are normal stresses they are added together. The tension allowable is the basic operating allowable times the joint efficiency. The compressive allowable is the factor B taken from UG-23 using the materials chart for the given material. The tangential shear in the shell varies depending on whether the shell is stiffened or the head acts as a stiffener, or neither of these cases. Tangential stress in the head only exists if the head is close enough to the saddle to be used as a stiffener. The allowable stress in shear is 80% of the allowable tensile stress for the head or shell. The stress at the horn of the saddle depends on the location of the saddle and the equivalent thickness of the saddle and wear pad. It is zero if rings stiffen the shell. This stress is always compressive and the allowable stress is a negative of the minimum of 1.5 times the allowable tensile stress and 0.9 times the yield stress. Use of the head as a stiffener creates additional tension stress in the head. The allowable additional stress in the vessel head is limited to 0.25 times the allowable tension stress in the head. If pressure is added, the resulting stress must be less than 1.25 times the allowable tensile stress. If the tip of the stiffening ring is in compression its allowable will be -0.5 times the yield stress. If a tensile condition exists the basic material allowable will be used.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-18
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
a) The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent when a wear plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and extends at least 5 degrees above the saddle horn. b) The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate. c) The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle. d) A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-19
Figure E - Wear Plate and Saddle Detail for a Typical Horizontal Tank
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
16-20
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-2
TUBESHEETS
Introduction
TUBESHEETS performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet exchangers, based on the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association, 8th Edition, 1999 or PD 5500, 2004 (British standard). Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet is also analyzed per TEMA and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-4
TUBESHEETS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-6
TUBESHEETS
Description
Enter a maximum 15 character alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-8
TUBESHEETS
Note that if you specify a differential pressure in the Differential Pressure Input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside will usually be ignored. The exception to this is for fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the Differential Pressure Input field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate calculations for differential pressure should be performed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-9
B.W.G. Gauge
7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Thickness (Inches)
.180 .165 .143 .120 .109 .095 .083 .072 .065
B.W.G. Gauge
17 18 19 20 22 24 26 27
Thickness (Inches)
.058 .049 .042 .035 .028 .022 .018 .016
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular, square, rotated triangular and rotated square layouts.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-10
TUBESHEETS
k for TEMA
0.60 0.80 1.00
k for PD:5500
0.50 0.707 1.00
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that give the maximum combination of k * SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two support baffles.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-11
Number of Grooves
Enter number of grooves in the tube hole.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-12
TUBESHEETS
The program analyzes the following tubesheet types. When one tubesheet is stationary and the other tubesheet is a floating type, then analyze the stationary tubesheet as one of the stationary types (listed below) and analyze the floating tubesheet as one of the tubesheet types (listed below). Examples include: AEP, AKT, AJW, NET, etc. If both tubesheets (front and rear) are stationary, then select the fixed tubesheet type. This can include any of the stationary tubesheet types as the front or rear tubesheet type. Choosing this geometry assures the differential thermal expansion (between the shell and the tubes) is properly accounted. Examples of some fixed configurations are BEM, NGN, AEL, etc. Use the table below to determine the correct tubesheet type.
Stationary tubesheet, gasketed on both sides (A)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-13
Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head (P) Floating tubesheets, head with backing device (S) Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head (T) Floating head, externally sealed floating tubesheet (W) Divided floating tubesheet (D) Fixed tubesheet exchanger - two stationary tubesheets (F)
See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA figure N-1.2 See TEMA 7.132 type k The figure below displays a NEN fixed tubesheet exchanger. A fixed tubesheet configuration can be comprised of any combination of stationary tubesheets.
Note: Each end can be any type of fixation i.e. integral, gasketed, etc.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-14
TUBESHEETS
Flange Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the Flange module. Select the flange mating to the tubesheet flange, and press enter, all the appropriate data for that flange will be copied in automatically. You will have to specify the thickness of the flanged extension.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable guess at the thickness if the actual thickness is unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the shell side or the tube side. The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also used in the equivalent thermal pressure calculation. When you have finished your design you should come back and put the actual thickness into this field and make sure the required thickness doesn't change.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-15
The T type floating tubesheet should also be checked with actual gasket G of the floating tubesheet.
TEMA Classification
Enter the TEMA classification of the Heat Exchanger from the following categories:
BCRChemical process service. This information is used in computing the minimum required tubesheet thickness. Moderate requirements of Commercial and general processes. Severe requirements of Petrochemical and related processing applications.
Tubesheet Clamped
Select the tubesheet edge condition. This determines how the tubesheet is supported at the edge by the shell or channel. This option is used for the PD:5500 code. Fig. 3.9-6 in PD:5500 2003, illustrates the edge support conditions. The available options are listed in the table below:
Stationary Simply/ Floating Simply Stationary Simply/ Floating Clamped Stationary Clamped/ Floating Simply Stationary Clamped/ Floating Clamped Select this option if both the stationary and the floating tubesheet are simply supported. Select this option if the stationary tubesheet is simply supported and the floating tubesheet is clamped. Select this option if the stationary tubesheet is clamped and the floating tubesheet is simply supported. Select this option if both the stationary and the floating tubesheet are clamped.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-16
TUBESHEETS
Existing - specify the spring rate for the expansion joint Analyze - specify the expansion joint. geometry and let the program compute spring rate and stresses. For more information see Figure E - Thick Expansion Joint.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-18
TUBESHEETS
Weld Type
Following options are available for the connecting tube/tubesheet welds:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-19
A full strength tube-to-tubesheet weld is one in which the joint strength is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial tube strength. A partial strength weld can be designed based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial load. No calculations are performed in this case.
Design Strength
This term is Fd as defined in the Code paragraph UW-20. The design strength should not be greater than Ft (tube strength), which is t(do - t)Sa. This value is used to determine the minimum acceptable fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet. This value is required for U-tube tubesheet exchanger. But, is optional for fixed and floating tubesheet exchangers. For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet joints on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the higher of the actual tube-totubesheet load and the user entered design strength will be used to size welds. For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, tube strength (Ft) is used to size welds.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-20
TUBESHEETS
Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Joint
a b b-1 c d e f g h i j k
Description
welded only, a >= 1.4t welded only, t <= a < 1.4 t Welded only, a < t brazed, examined brazed, not fully examined welded, a>=1.4t, exp. welded, a<1.4t, exp, with 2 or more grooves welded, a<1.4t, exp, enhanced with 1 groove welded a 1.4t, exp, not enhanced, 0 grooves expanded, enhanced, 2 or more grooves expanded, enhanced, single groove expanded, not enhanced no grooves
Fr.(test)
1.00 .70 .70 1.00 0.50 1.00 .95 .85 .70 .90 .80 .60
Fr.(no test)
.80 .55 ... .80 .40 .80 .75 .65 .50 .70 .65 .50
If PD:5500 is selected then use the table below to determine the efficiency and joint type. Table 3.9-2, Efficiencies and Joint Types Type
1 2 3 4 5 6
Joint
a b c d e f
Description
welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. expanded and welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. expanded and welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. expanded only explosion expanded/welded
Fr.(1)
.80 .55 .80 .55 .50 .80
These pressures are usually established analytically or experimentally. But, must consider the effect of change in material strength at operating temperature. This input is required only for the tube joint types i, j and k, as defined in table A-2 in ASME Sec VIII, Div-1 App. A.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-21
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-22
TUBESHEETS
Corroded
Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca
Uncorroded
Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - C
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-23
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-24
TUBESHEETS
FACING SKETCH
1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6
DESCRIPTION
flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-25
the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-26
TUBESHEETS
Facing Column
II
Flat Elastomers Below 75A Shore Durometer 75A Shore Durometer or higher 0.50 1.00 0 200 II II
Flat asbestos with suitable binder 1/8 inch thick 1/16 inch thick 1/32 inch thick 2.00 2.75 3.50 1600 3700 6500 II II II
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert 3 ply 2 ply 1 ply Vegetable Fiber
1.25
400
II
II II II II
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled Carbon Steel Stainless Steel or Monel 2.50 3.00 10000 10000 II II
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 2900 3700 4500 5500 6500 II II II II II
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-27
Gasket Material
Corrugated metal, not filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel
Gasket Factor m
Seating Stress y
Facing Column
II II II II II
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.50 3.75 3.75 5500 6500 7600 8000 9000 9000 II II II II II II
Grooved metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.75 4.25 5500 6500 7600 9000 10100 II II II II II
Solid flat metal Soft aluminum Soft copper or brass Iron or soft steel Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel 4.00 4.75 5.50 6.00 6.50 8800 13000 18000 21800 26000 I I I I I
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-28
TUBESHEETS
Gasket Material
Monel or 4-6% Chrome Stainless Steel
Gasket Factor m
6.00 6.50
Seating Stress y
21800 26000
Facing Column
I I
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-29
Full Face Gasket: Indicates to the program that this is a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. See the figure below:
Not a Full Face: Indicates to the program that this is not a full face gasket flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-30
TUBESHEETS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-31
Discussion of Results
Intermediate Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flange:
Two major additions to the tubesheet calculations occur when a tubesheet is extended as a flange. First, a moment is added to the pressure moment, which governs the thickness of most tubesheets. Second, a moment exists on the portion of the tubesheet, which serves as the flange, and the effects of this moment must be evaluated. The TEMA standard requires that these conditions be evaluated using the rules in the ASME Code, Appendix 2. Those rules, in turn, require the complete evaluation of bending moments on the flange. It is those bending moment calculations, which are reflected in this section of the output. The flange design rules in PD:5500 are also very similar to the ASME Appendix 2 rules. These calculations represent the basic bolt loading for the flanged portion of the tubesheet, and will be the same for the mating flange. The actual bending moments may change when compared to the mating flange. The flanged extension of the tubesheet is calculated as a ring type flange. Since no stresses are shown, you need to check the adequacy of the bolting by comparing the required bolt area to the actual bolt area. The bolt spacing correction factor is automatically included in the bending moment, such that the moment is the force times the distance times the bolt correction.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-32
TUBESHEETS
Chart Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Chart Name
TE-1 : Carbon and Low Alloy Steels B31.3 : 5Cr - 9Cr B31.3 : 18Cr - 8Ni TE-1 : 27Cr B31.3 : 25Cr20Ni B31.3 : 67Ni30Cu B31.3 : 3.5Ni B31.3 : Aluminum B31.3 : Cast Iron B31.3 : Bronze B31.3 : Brass B31.3 : 70 Cu - 30Ni B31.3 : Ni - Fe - Cr B31.3 : Ni - Cr - Fe B31.3 : Ductile Iron TEMA : Plain Carbon Stl & C - Mn Stl. TEMA : C - Si, C - 1/2Mo & Cr - 1/2Mo TEMA : C - Mn - Si, 1-1/4Cr - 1/2Mo & 3Cr - 1Mo TEMA : Mn - Mo TEMA : 2 - 1/2 & 3 - 1/2Ni TEMA : 2 - 1/4Cr - 1Mo TEMA : 5Cr - 1/2Mo TEMA : 7Cr - 1/2Mo & 9Cr - 1Mo TEMA : 12Cr & 13Cr TEMA : 15Cr & 17 Cr TEMA : TP316 & TP317 TEMA : TP304 TEMA : TP321 TEMA : TP347 TEMA : 25 Cr-12Ni, 23 Cr-12Ni, 25Cr-20Ni TEMA : Aluminum 3003 TEMA : Aluminum 6061
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-33
Chart Number
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Chart Name
TEMA : Titanium, Grades 1, 2, 3, 7 TEMA : Ni-Cu (Alloy 400) TEMA : Ni - Cr - Cr - Fe (Alloy 600) TEMA : Ni - Fe - Cr (Alloy 800 & 800H) TEMA : Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu (Alloy 825) TEMA : Ni - Mo (Alloy B) TEMA : Ni - Mo-Cr (Alloy 276) TEMA : Nickel (Alloy 200) TEMA : 70-30 Cu - Ni TEMA : 90 - 10 & 80 - 20 Cu - Ni TEMA : Copper TEMA : Brass TEMA : Aluminum Bronze TEMA : Copper - Silicon TEMA : Admiralty TEMA : Zirconium TEMA : Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb (Alloy 20Cb) TEMA : Ni - Cr -Mo - Cb (Alloy 625) TEMA : Tantalum TEMA : Tantalum with 2.5% Tungsten TEMA : 17 - 19 CR ( TP 439 ) TEMA : AL-6XN TEMA : 2205 (S311803) TEMA : 3RE60 (S31500) TEMA : 7 MO (S32900) TEMA : 7 MO PLUS (S32950) TEMA : AL 29-4-2 TEMA : SEA-CURE TEMA : C-Si, C-1/2 Mo & Cr- 1/2Mo TEMA : C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo & 3 CR - 1Mo TEMA : C-Mn-Si 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo & 3 CR - 1Mo
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-34
TUBESHEETS
When PD:5500 is selected, then the material band is mapped to nearest TEMA number, which is then used to look up the Young's modulus and the coefficient of thermal expansion. This is necessary since 5500 does not provide tables of thermal expansion versus temperature. When a fixed tubesheet is analyzed, the program calculates the following information: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The minimum tubesheet thickness per RCB-7.131. The values G, F, and ETA per RCB-7.132 and RCB-7.133 The equivalent differential expansion pressure per RCB-7.161 The equivalent bolting pressure per RCB-7.162 The effective shell side design pressure per RCB-7.163 The effective tube side design pressure per RCB-7.164 The required thickness per RCB-7.132 or RCB-7.133 The shell longitudinal stress per RCB-7.22 The tube longitudinal stress per RCB-7.23
10 The allowable tube compressive stress per RCB-7.24 11 The tube to tubesheet joint loads per RCB-7.25 If the tube or shell longitudinal stresses are being exceeded, it can be caused by the differential thermal expansion between the tubes and the shell. For example, when a tube is under compressive stress and the shell is under tensile stress, this indicates that the tube is trying to expand more than the shell. In this case an expansion joint can be used to relieve this axial stress. You can either put a thin expansion joint by checking the appropriate box (designed using the Thin Joint module) or a thick expansion joint (which can be designed the Tubesheet module or the Thick Joint module).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 17 TUBESHEETS
17-35
Note: The procedure followed when designing PD:5500 tubesheets is similar to the one shown here.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17-36
TUBESHEETS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 8
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-2
WRC 107\FEA
Introduction
This chapter discusses the WRC 107/FEA Module in PVElite. To begin, make sure that the current analysis type is WRC 107/FEA. This can be determined when viewing the MAIN MENU. There is also an interface for performing finite element analysis (FEA) of nozzle-shell junctions. WRC 107 is a method for determining stresses on the shell of a vessel when a nozzle or some rectangular attachment is being loaded. A typical case is to analyze the vessel stresses on a nozzle due to external piping loads. These loads are obtained from a piping flexibility analysis. This type of stress analysis is based on "Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings," Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, August 1965, and revision 1979, based on the prior work of P.P. Bijlaard. There is also a stress summation capability. The program computes overall stress intensities on a vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 2. Local vessel stress calculations for sustained, expansion, and occasional loads along with pressure stresses are transformed into code-defined stress components. The output, in the form of Pm, Pl, and Q and their appropriate combinations, can be compared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values. There are times when the applicability of the WRC bulletin 107 is in question or a particular design is out of the scope of the bulletin. Examples include large nozzles, hillside nozzles, and lateral nozzles. In these cases and others, FEA is the best way to get accurate results. The FEA interface in PVElite uses an encapsulated finite element program (NozzlePro) available from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com). To run the FEA, the user should purchase the NozzlePro program and install it. Then from the TOOLS MENU, choose CONFIGURATION and click on MISCELLANEOUS and set the path to the installation directory of NozzlePro. PVElite will automatically run it and present the results on the PVElite screen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-3
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Enter the Attachment Number for this Analysis
The attachment number should start out at 1 and continue by ones for each successive attachment to be analyzed. These whole integer numbers will be reflected in the input echo generated by the program. This number can be between up to 5 digits in length.
Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the Shells and Heads module. Just select the shell you want to model this nozzle with, and all the appropriate data will be brought in from that shell.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-4
WRC 107\FEA
spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method. Also, round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels.
Diameter of Vessel
Enter the diameter of the vessel in the units displayed. The diameter basis for the vessel is a user defined value and appears above with the vessel wall thickness, diameter basis and corrosion allowance known, PVElite will automatically determine the mean radius.
Material Name
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you type the name in this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a matching name. Some typical material names (standard ASME material):
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-5
Plates & Bolting SA-516 55 SA-516 60 SA-516 65 SA-516 70 SA-193 B7 SA-182-F1 SA-182 F1 SA-182 F11 SA-182 F12 SA-182 F22 SA-105 SA-36 SA-106 B Stainless Steels SA-240 304 SA-240 304L SA-240 316 SA-240 316L SA-193 B8 Aluminum SB-209 SB-234 Titanium SB-265 1 Nickel SB-409 SB-424
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-6
WRC 107\FEA
S. Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
Material
Low Carbon Steels, UTS <130 ksi Low Alloy Steels to 700 degree F Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F Austenitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel. Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 degree F
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the vessel in this field using the units above. The pressure stress equation is of the following form: Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri2 / ( ro2 - ri2 ) Hoop Stress = 2 * Longitudinal Stress. For the spherical case the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lame type equation to compute the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the edge of the attachment. When performing a finite element analysis, enter the internal pressure as positive and the external pressure as negative. WRC 107 can only analyze internal pressure.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-7
For FEA, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen, where:
SUS OPE OCC Primary Loads (typically Weight+Pressure+Forces) Operating Loads (typically Weight+Disp+Temp+Pressure+Forces) Occasional Loads (typically Wind, Seismic)
The Stress Summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on the different load cases. Examples of Occasional loads are wind/seismic loads or from some occasional conditions such as water hammer.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-8
WRC 107\FEA
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the nozzle diameter. Both the nozzle diameter and thickness must be specified. The nozzle diameter should be entered in accordance with the nozzle diameter basis. The units are displayed above.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-9
Material Name
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you type the name in this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a matching name. Some typical material names (standard ASME material name):
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-10
WRC 107\FEA
Plates & Bolting SA-516 55 SA-516 60 SA-516 65 SA-516 70 SA-193 B7 SA-182-F1 SA-182 F1 SA-182 F11 SA-182 F12 SA-182 F22 SA-105 SA-36 SA-106 B Stainless Steels SA-240 304 SA-240 304L SA-240 316 SA-240 316L SA-193 B8 Aluminum SB-209 SB-234 Titanium SB-265 1 Nickel SB-409 SB-424
Reinforcement
Select the type of reinforcement (if present) from the list. Selecting a reinforcement type causes a pop-up window to appear for prompts concerning reinforcing pad or hub dimensions. In a finite element analysis attachments can have a reinforcement pad or hub type self-reinforcement. Results are available for the some critical locations such as the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad. While in WRC 107 analysis (due to the limitations of the bulletin) only the reinforcement pad can be considered. When the reinforcing pad dimensions are included the program performs two analyses for this situation. The first analysis uses the nozzle OD and the vessel wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness. The second analysis takes the pad into account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a solid attachment.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-11
Pad Diameter
Enter the diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. This information will be used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using a solid attachment model. The reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. If external corrosion is to be considered, enter the corroded pad thickness. In WRC 107, when a pad is used the combined vessel+pad thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the nozzle. The corroded vessel thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the pad. The reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-12
WRC 107\FEA
Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell / Pad
It is an optional field. Enter the fillet leg size.
S. Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
Material
Low Carbon Steels, UTS <130 ksi Low Alloy Steels to 700 degree F Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F Austenitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel. Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 degree F
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-13
Is There a Knuckle?
Check here if this cone has a knuckle.
Compute Maximum Radial Force/Compute Maximum Circumferential Moment/Compute Maximum Longitudinal Moment
Often times a vessel designer would like to determine the maximum force or moment on an attachment while keeping the other 5 constant. By checking to one of these fields PVElite will iterate and determine the maximum force or moment to produce a desired stress intensity. If your geometry includes a reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform the same type analysis at the edge of the reinforcing pad. The above loads produce the highest local bending loads and will usually govern the design. This is why the shear loads and torsional moment are not options.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-14
WRC 107\FEA
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-16
WRC 107\FEA
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-17
Vessel Inside Temperature, Vessel Outside Temperature, Nozzle Inside Temperature and Nozzle Outside Temperature
Enter the inside and outside surface temperatures for the nozzle and the vessel, used for computing the thermal expansion.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-18
WRC 107\FEA
Discussion of Results
WRC 107 Stress Calculations
The program computes stress intensities in accordance with WRC 107 and includes the effects of longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes a reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform two analyses on the geometry. The first analysis will compute the stresses at the edge of the nozzle. The second stress analysis will be at the edge of the reinforcing pad. PVElite uses the Lam equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower surface of the cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as well as the longitudinal stress equation are as follows:
For each run performed a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading will be displayed for review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the curve figure for that loading has been exceeded.
Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at the Edge of the Nozzle?
Since the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses computed at the edge of the pad may be same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type of stress has been exceeded.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-19
Spherical Shells
Cylindrical Shells
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-20
WRC 107\FEA
Spherical Shells
To Define WRC Axes: 1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and positive entering the vessel. 2. M1-axis: Perpendicular to the nozzle centerline along convenient global axis. 3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis into the M1 axis and the result is the M2-axis. To Define WRC Stress Points: uupper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. llower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. APosition on vessel at junction, along negative M1 axis. BPosition on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. CPosition on vessel at junction, along positive M2 axis. DPosition on vessel at junction, along negative M2 axis.
Cylindrical Shells
To Define WRC Axes: 1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and positive entering the vessel. 2 . MC-axis: Along the vessel centerline and positive to correspond with any parallel global axis. 3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with the MC axis and the result is the ML-axis. To Define WRC Stress Points: uupper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. llower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. APosition on vessel at junction, along negative MC axis. BPosition on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis. CPosition on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis. DPosition on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis. Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same direction as the bending axis "ML." Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in the opposite direction as the bending axis "MC."
c d
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-21
Once the user has decided that an elastic analysis will be satisfactory, either a simplified or a comprehensive approach may be taken to the vessel stress evaluation. Both methods will be described in detail below, after a discussion of the Section VIII Div. 2 Requirements.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-22
WRC 107\FEA
1 2 3 4 5
Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm, Pl, and Q. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg. If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated using a k value of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same analogy, the peak stress limit may also be written as: Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below: "If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for cyclic operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135 has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design, fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."
The equations used in PVElite to qualify the various stress components can be summarized as follows:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-23
Pm(SUS) < Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh) If some of the conditions of in ASME VIII Div.2, AD-160 are not satisfied, you probably need to perform the formal fatigue analysis. Peak stresses are required to be calculated or estimated. You may consider using AD-560 "Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design" instead of Article 4-6 "Stresses in Openings for Fatigue Evaluation" to calculate the peak pressure stress for the opening. If all conditions of AD-560.1 through AD-560.6 are satisfied, the stress indices given in Table AD-560.7 may be used. If user clicked the corresponding box, the program will use these pressure stress indices to modify the primary stress due to internal pressure (hoop and longitudinal stresses). For external loads, the highest peak stress ais usually localized in fillets and transitions. If the user decides to use WRC107 stress concentration factors (Kn, Kb), the fillet radius between the Vessel and Nozzle is required. (If a reinforcing pad is used, the user can input the pad fillet radius.) The program will make a crude approximation and use WRC107 Appendix-B equations (3) and (4) to estimate Kn and Kb. The tension and bending stresses are thus modified using Kn and Kb respectively. The program outputs the local stresses for 4 pairs of points (upper and lower) at the intersection. The user should not direct the program to perform the stress summations. Instead the user should determine which stresses should be added based on locations in order to obtain the peak stress level, then use Appendix-4 & 5 rules and fatigue curves depending on operation cycles. Based on comparisons with finite element analysis, it is known that the top tip of the fillet weld on the nozzle usually experiences the highest peak stress due to external loads. So it is conservative to add all the peak stresses after including both pressure stress indices and concentration factors. Note that the stress summation may ONLY be used to check stress intensities, not stress levels. You need the peak stress level to perform fatigue analysis. The current stress summation routine does not compare stress level with fatigue allowables per Appendix-5. However, you may find the stress summation results useful to compare the combined effect due to the stress concentration factor and pressure stress indices. For more information on fatigue analysis see "WRC-107 Elastic Analysis v/s Fatigue Analysis". You can access this information in the June 2000 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pages 24-28) or via our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-24
WRC 107\FEA
1 2 3 4
The next report, the Highest Primary Stress Report, outlines the stresses at critical location like the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad. The Highest Secondary and fatigue Stress Reports are also provided. Next, the program lists Nozzle Stress Intensification factors for use in a beam type pipe stress analysis program such as CAESAR II. Then NozzlePro computes the maximum individual allowable loads and simultaneously acting allowable loads. Both Primary and Secondary loads are reported. SECONDARY Load Type (Range):
Axial Force (lb.) Inplane Moment (in. lb.) Outplane Moment (in. lb.) Torsional Moment (in. lb.) Pressure (psi)
The conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to-70% of the allowable. The Realistic Allowable Simultaneous loads are the maximum loads that can be applied simultaneously, they produce stresses that are closer to 100% of the allowable. The Maximum Individual Occurring Primary Pressure can be taken as a finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle. Nozzle-Shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities can be used to accurately model the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress program that is used to model the piping system attaching to the nozzle. Thus, users will have a choice of performing either an WRC 107 or a finite element analysis from within the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element program users should visually check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the FEA results make sense from stress analysis perspective. Technical queries regarding FEA results should be addressed to Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-25
Example
Examples illustrating these principles are located in the PVElite\Examples directory.
After confirming that the geometry guidelines per WRC 107 are met, the actual preparation of the WRC 107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in the WRC 107 procedure is to identify the correlation between the stress output global coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. PVElite performs this conversion automatically. The user will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the vessel as well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure is provided to illustrate the definition of the direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle.
Figure G - Converting Forces/Moments in CAESAR II Global Coordinates to WRC 107 Local Axes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-26
WRC 107\FEA
Notice that in order to define a vessel direction vector, the user first needs to designate the output data points (A->D) as defined by the WRC 107 Bulletin. Note that the line between data points B and A defines the vessel centerline (except for nozzles on heads, where the vessel centerline will have to be defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of the nozzle). Since, in the vessel/nozzle configuration shown, point A is assigned to the bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is always defined as the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel. For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be obtained from typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect the action of the piping on the vessel. The following data would then be entered into the WRC 107 program. You can use either the WRC-107 or global convention. The program will supply a pass/fail status at the end of the report. While on the input screen you can also toggle from one convention to another and the program will transform the loads automatically between the two conventions. Summary of Restraint Loads on the Vessel
Load Sustained Expansion X lb -26 8573 Y lb -1389 23715 Z lb 32 -5866 MX ft. lb -65 31659 MY ft. lb 127 -5414 MZ ft. lb 4235 -525
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
18-27
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
1 9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-2
Introduction
This chapter discusses the LEG & LUG module. To use the LEG & LUG module click on the LEG & LUG icon on the toolbar or select it from the analysis menu. The basic capabilities of the LEG & LUG module are to analyze structural members (legs), support lugs and lifting lugs. The basic required information for each of these analysis types is shown below. Vessel design internal pressure Design temperature for the attachment Vessel outside diameter Weight of vessel operating and dry Vessel dimensions Additional horizontal force on vessel Location of horizontal force above grade
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-3
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The design temperature for the attachment is used to compute the material properties for attachment being analyzed. In most cases the actual attachment temperature will be different from the vessel design temperature. The controlling stress for support lug and vessel leg calculations is the yield stress. The material yield stress can be looked up in the tables in ASME Section II Part D. The weight of the vessel should be the weight of the vessel while it is operating. This should include operating fluid, trays, insulation etc. Support lug calculations should use the same loading conditions. However since vessels are typically lifted "dry" the empty weight of the vessel should be used when performing lifting lug calculations. There is a separate field for lifting weight of the vessel.
Item Number
Enter the a positive integer value (i.e. 1) in this cell. This number will not be used in the analysis but will be displayed on the screen while the program is executing.
Vessel Description
Enter a meaningful descriptor for this analysis. This will be displayed on the screen and in the output reports. An example might be Cryogen - 1. An alphanumeric combination up to 15 characters may be used.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure that the vessel will be operating at. The program does not use this value, however, the pressure will be an input item for WRC 107. This is also a good number to have for information purposes.
Shell Thickness
Enter the shell thickness. This input is used only in the case of a support lug with a full reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to compute the Area and Moment of Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-4
Shell Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you cannot find the material you need in the Material Database, you can add its specification and properties by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS.
Type of Analysis
Use the table below to determine the appropriate analysis type:
Analysis Type
Support Lug
Description
If the vessel rests on support lugs select this option. The program prompts you to enter all information necessary to determine the stress in these types of supporting attachments. If the vessel rests on vessel legs select this option. The program prompts you to enter all information necessary to perform an AISC Unity Check on the vessel legs. This option also allows you to design the leg, baseplate and anchor bolts. If the vessel is lifted by lug type attachments select this option. The program prompts you to enter information pertaining to the lifting lugs. If the vessel is lifted by a trunnion select this option. The program prompts you to enter information pertaining to the trunnion design. Note: You can also perform a local stress analysis on the trunnion per WRC 107 methods.
Vessel Leg
Analyze Baseplate
Check this box for designing the baseplate and anchor bolts per Moss and Bednar.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-7
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value of the importance factor that you wish the program to use. The importance factor accounts for the degree of hazard to life and property. Please note the program will use this value directly without modification. Values of typical importance factors are listed below for ASCE 7-93, ASCE 7-95/98/02 and UBC 1997 standards. ASCE7-93: Following values are used for ASCE 7-93. In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11.:
Category
I II III IV
At Oceanline
1.05 1.11 1.11 1.00
Category Classification:
I II III IV buildings and structures not listed below buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc. buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure
Note that most petrochemical structures are 1, Importance I. ASCE-7-95/98/02: In general this value ranges from .77 to 1.15. It is taken from table 6-2 of the ASCE 95 standard or table 6-1 from the 98 standard.
Category
I II III IV
In the 98 standard for Wind Speeds > 100 mph for category I, the importance factor can be 0.77. Category Classification:
I II III IV buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the event of failure buildings and structures except those listed in categories I, III and IV buildings and structures that represent a substantial hazard in the event of a failure buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-8
UBC: For UBC 1997 code these values are listed as follows:
Category
I, Essential facilities II, Hazardous facilities III, Special occupancy structures IV, Standard occupancy structures
Wind Exposure
This category reflects the characteristics of ground surface irregularities for the site at which the structure is to be constructed. Use the table below to determine the appropriate exposure category For ASCE codes, the exposure categories are as follows
Exposure Category
A B C D
Description
Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 feet. Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings. Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands. Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large bodies of water.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-9
Description
Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site. Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from the site in any full quadrant. The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 16-G.
Types of Hill
Enter the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details. None 2-D Ridge 2-D Escarpment 3-D Axisymmetric Hill
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-10
Seismic Zone
Select the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in ASCE #7 and reproduced below. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. An Identifier of 5( zone 4) will produce the highest saddle load reactions. These values are derived from UBC. The basic equation for lateral G force is : Cs = Z I C / Rw : Rw = 3, C = 2.75, I = 1.0
Seismic Zone
0 1 2a 2b 3 4
Cs
0.0 0.069 0.138 0.184 0.275 0.367
Figure B - Seismic risk map of United States from the ASCE code
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-11
Cs
0.0 0.069 0.138 0.184 0.275 0.367
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-12
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal to 3 and less than 16. PVElite will determine the effective number of legs for bending and shear of the vessel.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel. This length term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more likely to buckle than shorter legs. The distance of the tangent line of the vessel above grade should always be equal to the length of the legs. If they are not the same PVElite will use the maximum of the two when determining the wind pressure and the location of the centroid.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-14
Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed PVElite reads all of the data out of the structural database (AISC89.BIN). The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compression loads as outlined in AISC paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula will be shown as appropriate. The combination of stresses due to bending and compression will be compared to the allowable per AISC 1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0 the member has failed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-16
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-17
WRC 107 only addresses rectangular, square or round attachment shapes, but other shapes (e.g. support lug) can be modeled by converting to an equivalent rectangle which has: The same moment of Inertia The same ratio of length to width of the original attachment. Program uses this approach to convert the lug into an equivalent rectangle. This approach is referenced in WRC bulletin 198 by Dogde as, simple and direct, but is not derived by any mathematical or logical reasoning. So, very large or critical loads should, be examined in depth.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-18
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-19
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the lifting lug analysis. For more information see Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure D Lifting Orientation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-20
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For more information see Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more information see Figure D Lifting Orientation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-21
Output
PVElite produces three basic types of results in the LEG & LUG module. Results for Legs, using the methods described by AISC, results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering principles, and results for Support Lugs, using AISC methods and formulae from pressure vessel textbooks and other engineering reference texts. The input for this module includes some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangent-tangent length, the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are performing a Leg or Support Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in order to determine the loads. For evaluation of wind loads: 1 2 3 4 5 Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel. Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average. Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area. Compute the centroid of the vessel. Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid.
For evaluation of seismic loads: 1 2 3 Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave. Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel. Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel.
If both types of loadings are considered, PVElite will compute both and then choose the maximum of the two.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-22
Baseplate Input
Baseplate Thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe, and angle leg only, and can be activated by clicking the Analyze Baseplate check box. The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual by D. Moss and is applied to the other leg shapes. PVElite will assume the following for all Baseplate Thickness calculations: Strong axis leg orientation Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension). The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate. It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of PVElite.
AISC
In this method, the thickness of the baseplate is calculated by assuming the baseplate is in compression state; where as the anchor bolts are sized to resist the lifting force/moment. For more information refer to second edition of Pressure Vessel Design Handbook by Bednar page 153. In Analyze mode, the baseplate thickness is calculated using the input baseplate dimensions (B &D). However, in Optimize mode, the baseplate thickness is calculated by maximizing the use of the concrete strength. For more information refer to AISC Handbook page 3-106. The Total Number of Bolt per Base Plate is assumed to carry all the lifting load on the baseplate. It is up to the user to specify the location of each bolt. The Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate input is not required. The Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, the "z" dimension, is not required.. The program assumes the leg is attached symmetrically on the base plate.
Moss
The Total Number of Bolt per Base Plate should be an even number. The program assumes that the bolts are located along the length (B) of the base plate as shown in the left figure. In case there is no wind/earth quake/horizontal loads, the Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate is not required. If there is wind/earth quake/horizontal loads, the Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate should be the number of bolts along one length dimension, shown as three bolts in the figure. When this input is left blank, its values is assumed to be half of the total number of bolts. The program assumes the leg is attached symmetrically on the base plate. The Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, the "z" dimension, is same along the width and along the length.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-23
Baseplate Length B
Enter the length "B" of the baseplate.
Baseplate Width D
Enter the width "D" of the baseplate.
Baseplate/Bolt Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a material is not a contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDITS/ADD MATERIALS from the Main Menu.
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z"
Enter the "z" dimension of the baseplate. For more information see Figure C - Baseplate Dimension.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-24
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-25
Baseplate Results
Baseplate analysis produces the following results: The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress and compared to the input thickness. The concrete bearing pressure is compared to the input allowable stress The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel moment equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts, you should choose a practical bolt size.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-26
Trunnion Input
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed using the TRUNNION DESIGN module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design are stresses at the vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check are calculated and compared with the appropriate allowables. Local stresses at the junction can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis Selection check box. The lifting orientation, vertical and horizontal positions, and the orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis. PVElite assumes that the loads entered act on one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with two trunnions thus the load is divided between them. An option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting on that trunnion during the lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified by the user. Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces' magnitude and direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc. The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.
Trunnion Thickness
Enter the thickness of the trunnion. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Projection Length
Enter the projection length of the trunnion. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Bail/Sling Width
Enter the bail or sling width used during erection. This input is required for locating the lifting load only. No analysis is performed on the bail or sling. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Material
Enter the material the trunnion is made of. Depending on the size and the availability, the trunnion can be made of pipe or sheet plate. To properly initialize the material, type its name in this field even if the default displays. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specifications and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-27
Reinforcement
This input is required to perform the WRC 107 Analysis.
Ring Thickness
The ring thickness is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the calculations. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the trunnion analysis. This value will be used to perform WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure D Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For more information see Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more information see Figure D Lifting Orientation.
Importance Factor
When the vessel is lifted from the ground it may be yanked abruptly. The importance factor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0 although values as high as 3.0 may be used. The program multiplies the lifting load by the importance factor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-28
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-29
Trunnion Results
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to display a picture only. There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used: Bending Stress: 0.66 *Sy*Occfac Shear Stress: 0.40 *Sy*Occfac Bearing Stress: 0.75 *Sy*Occfac WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the allowable (1.5 * Sallow). For more information see the WRC 107 module.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
19-30
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-2
Introduction
This chapter discusses the PIPE & PAD module in PVElite. PIPE & PAD computes the required wall thickness and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping Code. Extruded outlet headers are also analyzed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-3
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Intersection Number
Enter an intersection number for this analysis. These should be positive integer values incremented by one.
Intersection Description
Enter a 15 alphanumeric identifier for this intersection. This description will not be used in the analysis, however, it will be used in the error checker and in the output reports. This identifier should have some link to the actual intersection. An example might be "Int 12x4".
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure that the system will operate at continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall thickness etc. involve the design pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the intersection. This temperature will be used to determine the allowable stress of the branch. The user may note that if a new temperature is input the allowable stress information of the branch is updated automatically.
Any material can be used as long as the hot and cold allowables are properly specified.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-4
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness - (corrosion allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-6
GR 1.1 Med C Steel GR 1.2 High C Steel GR 1.4 Low C Steel GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo GR 1.7 /2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo GR 1.9 -1/4Cr-1/2Mo GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo GR 2.1 Type 304 GR 2.2 Type 316 GR 2.3 Type 304L, 316L GR 2.4 Type 321 GR 2.5 Type 347, 348 GR 2.6 Type 309 GR 2.7 Type 310
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of reinforcing element in this cell. The user should take into consideration all allowances for corrosion.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-8
Output
PVElite will generate output for maximum allowable working pressure new and cold as well as the corroded condition. Hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure at the design condition times 1.5 the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature to the allowable stress at the design temperature. The replaced area can only be within a certain zone. No credit will be given for reinforcement that lies outside of the zone. Please note that these zones are different for extruded outlets. If a reinforcing element is used PVElite will compute the required diameter for the given thickness and the required thickness for the given diameter. If a pad is used in conjunction with an extruded outlet header consult the piping code for details on this design. If the calculated diameter falls outside the limit of reinforcement a message such as "EXCEEDS D2" or "EXCEEDS L4" will be displayed. The MAWP for the given geometry is an estimate because of a slight non-linearity in the required thickness calculation. To verify the MAWP plug the value back into the analysis as the design pressure and check to see if the area required is equal to the area available.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20-9
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-2
BASE RINGS
Introduction
The PVElite BASE RING module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-3
Calculations
Calculation Techniques
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the base ring is the equation for a simple cantilever beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, including Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, formula 12.12: t Where fc l s = = = bearing stress on the concrete cantilever length of base ring allowable bending stress of base ring (typically 1.5 times Code allowable). = SQRT( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the concrete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to fc Where W M A c I = = = = = Weight of vessel (worst case). Bending moment on vessel (worst case). Cross sectional area of base ring on foundation Distance from the center of the base ring to the edge Moment of inertia of the base ring on the foundation = -W / A - M * c / I
However, when a steel skirt and base ring are supported on a concrete foundation, the behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the strain in the base ring at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors, including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This formulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method: In this case a neutral axis parallel to the Y-axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and the angle alpha.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-4
BASE RINGS
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the neutral plane. Let n be the ratio of Young's moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results: p s alpha Where t3 c = = width of base ring (similar to l in Jawad & Farr's equations above) bolt circle diameter = = = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c] (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2) acos [(s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh & Soler equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here. These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed]. Then alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s (say po' and so'). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose: s1 p1 = = .5 * (so + so') .5 * (po + po')
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within specified tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value), Where ei Ei = = (si' - si) / si (pi' - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the starting values of so and po. Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate method.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-6
BASE RINGS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-7
W N R M
= = = =
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-8
BASE RINGS
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the allowable stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials factor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calculations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated, the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allowable stress approaches the actual stress.
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight and bending moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They thus categorize this stress as secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of this stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the required thickness of the skirt at the top of the base ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-9
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Base Ring Number
The base ring number should start out at 1 and increment by 1 for each successive base ring analyzed. A blank entry for the base ring number will cause PVElite not to analyze the data for that base ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-10
BASE RINGS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-11
Bolt Size(inches)
1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 11/2 1 5/8 1 3/4 1 7/8 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 3 1/4 3 1/2 3 3/4 4
This information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the base ring design calls for. If the BASE RINGS program is in design mode, it may change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the maximum load per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 120.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-12
BASE RINGS
Bolt Table
The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring )
Enter the type of top ring or plate per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring). Refer to Dennis Moss "Pressure Vessel Design Manual" p129. If type 3 or 4 is entered, the program will calculate per p130.
Skirt Thickness
Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. PVElite will automatically compute the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial stress. PVElite uses the ASME code compression allowable B for axial stresses.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-13
Skirt Temperature
If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Normally, skirts are at ambient temperature.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-14
BASE RINGS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-16
BASE RINGS
The Tailing Lug calculation is included in the base ring analysis for a single or dual type design as depicted in Figure B Tailing Lug Edit Window. The design is based on a lift position where bending does not occur on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design are the section modulus, shear, and bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength. The location of the center of the pinhole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer most of the top ring or the base ring, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/plate the height of the tailing lug is required. The tailing lug is assumed to be the same material as the gusset or base ring. Note that all input fields pertain to one tail lug.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-17
Discussion of Input
Tailing Lug Input
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis
Click this check box to perform the Tailing Lug analysis.
Centerline offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the lug thickness of the tailing lug.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-18
BASE RINGS
Discussion of Results
The tailing lug design consists of a three-part analysis: The base ring assembly ( base ring, skirt and top ring), The strength of weld The tailing lug itself It is assumed that bending does not occur in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only the base ring and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation. The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength. Stress Type
Shear at Pin Hole Bearing Stress Weld Stress
Allowable Value
0.4 Sy 0.75 Sy 0.49 Sallow
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
21-19
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-2
THIN JOINTS
Introduction
THIN JOINTS calculates the stresses in a metal bellows expansion joint of the type typically used in piping systems and heat exchangers. The module does elastic stress analysis for the stresses due to the internal and external pressures, and closing or opening of the joint. The maximum combined stress is used to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the appropriate formula in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26 Edition 2004 A-05.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-4
THIN JOINTS
Description
Displays an alphanumeric description of the expansion joint in this field. This should relate in some way to the expansion joint i.e. (a project id).
Design Temperature
Displays the design temperature of the expansion joint. During normal operation, expansion joints typically run cooler than the piping/pressure vessel. Determine that temperature and enter it here.
Value
Result
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-5
0.00 14.7
U-Shaped
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-6
THIN JOINTS
Toroidal
Reinforcement/Collar Information
Enable this box to activate the reinforcement dialog for entering ring and collar information.
Poisson's Ratio
Displays Poisson's ratio for the bellow material (vb).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-7
Convolution Depth
The convolution depth is the distance from the top of the convolution to the trough of the convolution. This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code. For more information refer to Figure A.
Convolution Pitch
The convolution pitch is the distance between the tops of successive bellows convolutions. This is referred to as q in the ASME Code. For more information refer to Figure A.
Number of Convolution
Displays the total number of convolutions
Number of Plies
Displays the total number of plies (n) used to form the bellow wall. The final thickness of bellow is referred to as nt in Figures A and B.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-8
THIN JOINTS
Fatigue strength reduction factors can be determined from theoretical, experimental, or photo elastic studies.
Material Condition
Select the method of which the U-Shaped bellow is being made of. This selection will be used to determine the multiplier Kf for the combined meridional membrane and bending stress allowables.
Material Condition
Annealed Formed
Kf
1.5 3.0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-10
THIN JOINTS
Collar Present?
Check this box to enable the entries for the collar information.
Collar Material
Enter the collar material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. You can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/ EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22-11
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-2
THICK JOINTS
Introduction
This module applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers, which require flexible elements to reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) are not included within the purview of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs are based upon the equivalent geometry used in "Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers" by S. Kopp and M.F. Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell theory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with this method. (TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61). The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions: Applied loadings are axial Torsional loads are negligible The flexible elements are sufficiently thick to avoid instability. The flexible elements are axisymmetric. All dimensions are in inches and all forces are in pounds. (TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61: note that other systems of units may be used for input and output, since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its internal calculations.) The sequence of calculations used by the program is as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user input) Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22. Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3. Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4. Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell elements per RCB-8.5. Calculate "FAX" for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you run the PVElite TUBESHEET module to determine the differential expansion and shellside and tubeside equivalent pressures. Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7 Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the Code, for the load conditions as noted in step 6. Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary. More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate the hydrotest and uncorroded conditions.
Note:
Thick Expansion joints can also be designed in the TUBESHEET module. This integration allows PVElite to automatically transfer the needed information between the tubesheet and the expansion joint calculation. Figure A shows the geometry for the THICK JOINT module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and RCB-8.22). Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for the analysis are shown. The discussion of input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-3
The stresses computed from the TEMA standard are compared to their respective allowables, as per APP-5 in ASME code Sec. VIII Div. 1. The cycle life is also computed to address the fatigue consideration.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-4
THICK JOINTS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-5
Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu. Note that the program uses the external pressure charts to determine the modulus of elasticity and material type for the analysis.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-6
THICK JOINTS
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if less than the cylinder length. This value is shown on Figure A as 'li'.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-8
THICK JOINTS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-10
THICK JOINTS
Discussion of Results
The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant for the joint, the stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed below.
Spring Constant
The program does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring constant for the joint, which can be used in the Tubesheet program or elsewhere to determine the effect of the joint on the heat exchanger design.
Stresses
The program calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the expansion joint and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix CC, this stress should be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of the inner and outer torus (or sharp corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material at operating temperature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure - stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allowables. Thus the program only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the case of shellside pressure.
Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys, nickel-iron chromium alloys and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as follows: N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17 For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equation for cycle life is: N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17 Where: Kg = The fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for the geometrical stress concentration factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions. The range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical shapes and its maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a Kg of 1.0 when the knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thickness. Sn = The maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection. Eb = The modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The program determines both the modulus of elasticity and the material type from the name of the external pressure chart given by the user.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
23-11
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-2
ASME TUBESHEETS
Introduction
This module computes the required thickness for tubesheets and shell/channel/tube stresses according to the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 part UHX, Edition 2004 A-05. Tubesheet types that are addressed are U-tube, fully fixed and floating. PVElite also computes the allowable Tube-Tubesheet joint load per ASME Sec. VIII Appendix A. Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet is also analyzed per TEMA standard, 8th edition and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-4
ASME TUBESHEETS
Tubesheet Description
Type an alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a description will help you keep up with each item when reviewing the output.
Shell/Channel Merge
Use this option to import data from the Shells and Heads module. Select the shell you want to add to the model, and press enter, all the appropriate data for that shell is copied in automatically.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-6
ASME TUBESHEETS
For computing allowable Tube-Tubesheet Joints loads, the allowable stress of a seamless tube is needed. If the user selected a welded tube and enables this check box, then the tube allowable stress is divided by 0.85 to an equivalent allowable of a seamless tube. This is per the note in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 UW-20.3 and App. A.
B.W.G. Gauge
7 8 10 11 13 14 15 16
Thickness (Inches)
.180 .165 .134 .109 .095 .083 .072 .065
B.W.G. Gauge
17 18 19 22 24 26 27
Thickness (Inches)
.058 .049 .042 .028 .022 .018 .016
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-7
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term "eta" in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
Length of Tubes
Enter the length of the tubes. For U-tubesheet exchanger this is the straight length of the tube. For fixed tubesheet exchanger this is the overall length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of the tubes.
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL and Tube End Condition, K for MAX (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where,
SL - Unsupported Span of the tube k - Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the different values of k:
K
0.6 0.8 1.0
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combination of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two support baffles.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-8
ASME TUBESHEETS
Type of Tubesheet
Choose the type of tubesheet that you will be analyzing. ASME has four distinct types of tubesheets for analysis purposes. These are Fixed and U Tube, Stationary and Floating tubesheets. A fixed tubesheet exchanger is one that is subject to loads arising from differential thermal expansion between the tubes and the shell. It consists of stationary tubesheets on both sides. A fixed tubesheet exchanger can be further classified into Configurations A, B, C or D. U Tube exchangers can be categorized as integral with the shell, channel, both or gasketed on both sides.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-9
Floating tubesheet heat exchangers consist of a stationary tubesheet and a floating tubesheet. Based on the selected tubesheet type, the program will automatically reset other inputs on this dialog, such as tubesheet gasketed with which side or tubesheet integral with which side. Some Tubesheet configurations are illustrated below: Tubesheet is integral with the Shell and is gasketed on the Channel side and is not extending as a flange.
Tubesheet is integral with the Shell and is gasketed on the Channel side and is extending as a flange.
Tubesheet is gasketed on both the Shell and the Channel sides and is not extended as a flange. In an alternative arrangement the tubesheet is extending as a flange.
Tubesheet is integral with both the Shell and the Channel. This is a fixed tubesheet exchanger; flanged and flued expansion joint is used to reduce the differential thermal expansion between the tubes and the shell.
Stationary and U-Tube Tubesheet Configurations Permitted per ASME Section UHX:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-10
ASME TUBESHEETS
a b c d e f
Tubesheet integral with both the shell and the channel. Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and extended as a flange. Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and not extended as a flange. Tubesheet gasketed with both the shell and the channel Tubesheet integral with the channel, gasketed with the shell and extended as a flange. Tubesheet integral with the channel, gasketed with the shell and not extended as a flange.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the appropriate tubesheet thickness. For all types of exchangers, the complete initial calculations will be performed and printed using the original tubesheet thickness. PVElite will converge on the minimum required tubesheet thickness for the given loading condition.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-11
Enter Dimension G for Backing Flange (for Tubesheets with Backing Ring) or Gc for Tubesheets Gasketed with Shell and Channel
This input is used for two types of ASME tubesheet geometries: If the tubesheet has a backing ring, then enter the G dimension for the backing ring. G is the mid point of the contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet. In this case it is a required input. If the tubesheet is gasketed with both the Shell and the Channel, then enter the channel gasket reaction diameter, Gc in this input. The program computes the Shell gasket reaction diameter, Gs from the gasket/flange properties specified. In this case, this input is optional, required only if Gc is different from Gs.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-12
ASME TUBESHEETS
Thick Expansion Joint - Select this option if the expansion joint is:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-13
Flanged and flue Flanged only No flanged or no flue. You can specify 2 design options: Existing - specify the spring rate for the expansion joint Analyze - specify the expansion joint geometry and let the program compute spring rate and stresses. For more information, see Figure D - Thick Expansion Joint.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-14
ASME TUBESHEETS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-16
ASME TUBESHEETS
Weld Type
Following options are available for the connecting tube/tubesheet welds:
Full Strength Partial Strength Seal Weld/No Weld A full strength tube-to-tubesheet weld is one in which the design strength is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial tube strength. In other words the joint is at least as strong as the tube. A partial strength weld can be designed based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial load No calculations are performed in this case.
Information on these weld types can be found in the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 paragraph UW-20.
Design Strength
This term is Fd as defined in the Code paragraph UW-20. The design strength should not be greater than Ft (tube strength), which is t(do - t)Sa. This value is used to determine the minimum acceptable fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet. This value is required for U-tube tubesheet exchanger. But, is optional for fixed and floating tubesheet exchangers. For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the higher of the actual tube-totubesheet load and the user entered design strength will be used to size welds. For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, tube strength (Ft) is used to size welds.
ASME Sec. VIII Div. I UW-20 This method provides rules for computation of allowable loads for Full strength and Partial strength Tube-Tubesheet welds.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-17
Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Joint
a b c d e f g h i j k
Description
Welded only, a >= 1.4t Welded only t <= a < 1.4t Brazed examined Brazed not fully examined Welded a >= 1.4t, exp. Welded a < 1.4t,exp,2 grooves Welded a < 1.4t,exp,1 grooves Welded a < 1.4t,exp,0 grooves Expanded 2 or more grooves Expanded single groove Expanded no grooves
Fr.(test)
1.00 .70 1.00 0.50 1.00 .95 .85 .70 .90 .80 .60
Fr.(no test)
.80 .55 .80 .40 .80 .75 .65 .50 .70 .65 .50
These pressures are usually established analytically or experimentally. But, must consider the effect of change in material strength at operating temperature. This input is required only for the tube joint types i, j and k, as defined in table A-2 in ASME Sec VIII, Div-1 App. A.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-18
ASME TUBESHEETS
Metal Temperatures
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints or floating tubesheets, that you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design. Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet at the rim, under realistic operating conditions. Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions. Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the channel at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions. The following metal temperatures are required only for fixed tubesheet exchangers. Mean Shell Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell along its length, under realistic operating conditions. Mean Tube Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tube along its length, under realistic operating conditions. Refer to TEMA standard, section T-4 (8th Ed.) for guidance to compute the Mean Metal Temperatures.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-19
Load Case #
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Corroded
Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca
Uncorroded
Fvs+Pt-Th-Ca Ps+Fvt-Th-Ca Ps+Pt-Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th-Ca Fvs+Pt+Th-Ca Ps+Fvt+Th-Ca Ps+Pt+Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th-Ca
Note: Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shellside and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0. Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube-side Design Pressures. Th - With or without Thermal Expansion. Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-20
ASME TUBESHEETS
If this input is left blank, it is set equal to the tubesheet OD. Specify this input, for cases where flanged portion OD is different from the tubesheet OD. For tubesheets that are gasketed with both the shell and channel, this input is for the shell side.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-21
Facing Sketch
1a 1b 1c 1d 2 3 4 5 6
Description
flat finish faces serrated finish faces raised nubbin-flat finish raised nubbin-serrated finish 1/64 inch nubbin 1/64 inch nubbin both sides large serrations, one side large serrations, both sides metallic O-ring type gasket
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-22
ASME TUBESHEETS
Program Selects: Instructs the program to automatically make the determination if this is a full face gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. See the figure below.
Full Face Gasket: Indicates to the program that this is a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt circle diameter. See the figure below:
Not a Full Face: Indicates to the program that this is not a full face gasket flange.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-23
Thread Series
The following bolt thread series tables are available: TEMA Bolt Table UNC Bolt Table User specified root area of a single bolt TEMA Metric Bolt Table British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units. TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-24
ASME TUBESHEETS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-25
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-26
ASME TUBESHEETS
Discussion of Results
Part UHX of the Code is divided into four major sections. The first section discusses u-tube exchangers, the second discusses fixed tubesheet exchangers, the third section discusses floating tubesheet exchangers and the fourth section discusses tube-to-tubesheet joint weld. There is a sequence of steps to follow when performing calculations for each type of exchanger. PVElite will perform each step and print the applicable formula substitution and answers for each step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition, the program will iterate for the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed PVElite will also perform the second elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. The program can run multiple load cases for the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code. The table below displays the load cases that are considered for a fixed tubesheet exchanger.
Load Case #
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Corroded
Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca
Uncorroded
Fvs+Pt-Th-Ca Ps+Fvt-Th-Ca Ps+Pt-Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th-Ca Fvs+Pt+Th-Ca Ps+Fvt+Th-Ca Ps+Pt+Th-Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th-Ca
Note: Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0. Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube-side Design Pressures. Th - With or without Thermal Expansion. Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses based on if it is a pressure only load case or pressure + thermal load case. Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. You can enter your own shell/channel vacuum pressures for the multicase analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the process fluid streams being stopped, while the other stream continues. In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of withstanding the axial forces imposed on them due to differential thermal expansion. These forces must be less than the allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equations (App A or UW-20). Tube stresses are also checked against the criteria in section UHX.. Finally, discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables are exceeded, PVElite will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity of the integral component is considered. Typically, when this iteration is performed, the stress values will decrease below their allowable values. If for any reason they do not, the geometry of the unit must be reconsidered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-27
If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the overall tubesheet thickness. Bending stress at the junction of shell/channel and tubesheet can also be reduced by having a local shell band adjacent to the tubesheet.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
24-28
ASME TUBESHEETS
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
25-2
HALF-PIPES
Introduction
HALF-PIPE performs pressure calculations for half-pipe jackets attached to cylindrical shells using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 25 HALF-PIPES
25-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
25-4
HALF-PIPES
Thickness of Shell
Type the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness value will be tested to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the externally applied jacket pressure. Please refer to 'Ts' in Figure A.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 25 HALF-PIPES
25-5
NPS
50 65 80 90 100
SI
5.08 cm 6.35 cm 7.62 cm 8.89 cm 10.16 cm
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
25-6
HALF-PIPES
It is important to note that the program selected pipe schedules include a standard mill tolerance of 0.875 (a reduction of 12.5%). This tolerance will not, however, be included in the user input value of thickness. This allows users to include their own mill tolerance in their input value, without having this value further adjusted.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 25 HALF-PIPES
25-7
Discussion of Results
Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation HALF-PIPE performs is the required thickness of the shell due to the internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation 1 from Paragraph UG-27 of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in this calculation. Because the exterior of the shell wall is also used as the internal halfpipe jacket wall (for more information see the figure displayed under the Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis section ), both the corrosion allowance of the shell and the corrosion allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are displayed in this section of the output. Once the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness due to the external pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is obtained through the pressure calculations discussed in the next section.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
25-8
HALF-PIPES
two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum fillet weld size. The output report indicates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based upon.
Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo of the input thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness calculations. The comparison of these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness of the shell is governed by the internal or external pressure. The next three displayed values are the jacket pressure results. The input design pressure is shown along with the MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next displayed values are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness selected by the program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 25 HALF-PIPES
25-9
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
26-2
LARGE OPENINGS
Introduction
PVElite analyzes flat heads as discussed in Chapter 4 of this manual. However, the program will also analyze a large nozzle in the welded flat head that has a large centrally located opening. This program is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14 of the 2004 Edition with 2005 addenda.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
26-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
26-4
LARGE OPENINGS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
26-5
Example Problem
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-2
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Introduction
RECTANGULAR VESSELS performs internal pressure calculations for rectangular vessels using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-4
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Figure A - Rectangular vessel with equivalent long side thickness (Type A1)
Figure B - Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Type A2)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-6
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-8
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-10
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Description
Enter a maximum 15 character alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/ EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-11
Figure
A B C D E F G G H H I J K K L
Vessel Type
Rectangular vessel with equal long-side plate thickness Rectangular vessel with unequal long-side thickness Rectangular vessel with rounded corners Reinforced rectangular vessel Non-continuously reinforced rectangular vessel Non-continuous reinforced with rounded corners Rectangular vessel with single stay plate Rectangular vessel with single row of bars Rectangular vessel with two stay plates Rectangular vessel with double row of bars Obround vessel Reinforced obround vessel Obround vessel with single stay plate Obround vessel with single row of bars Circular vessel with single diametral plate
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-12
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
H h L1 H L3 L3 h h h h 2R 2R 2R 2R
Inside length of long-side of vessel Inside length of long-side of vessel Half-length of short-side minus the corner radius Inside length of short-side of vessel Half-length of short-side of vessel Half-length of short-side of vessel Inside length of short-side of vessel Inside length of short-side of vessel Inside length of short-side of vessel Inside length of short-side of vessel Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side
Type of Reinforcement
Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel. When a reinforced vessel is selected, the first responses are those of the pitch distance and the delta value.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-13
Corrosion Allowance
Type the appropriate corrosion allowance. The program adjusts the actual thickness and the inside diameter of the vessel, and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of the stay plate/bar.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-14
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Modulus of Elasticity
If an external pressure has been input, enter the Elastic Modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature.
Length of Vessel
Type the length dimension of vessel type C1.
C-Factor
The C-factor is an attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47, and will default to 2.1.
Delta
Type the material parameter used to calculate pitch. Materials listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-15
Material
Carbon Steel Austenitic SS Ni-Cr-Fe Ni-Fe-Cr Aluminum Nickel Copper Unalloyed Titanium
English
6000 5840 6180 6030 3560 5720 4490
SI
15754.54 15334.42 16227.17 15833.31 9347.69 15019.33 11789.65
Vessel Radius
Type the inside radius of the vessel type C1.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-16
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Diameter of Hole
Type the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure M. The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.
Depth of Hole
Type the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure M. The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-18
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Discussion of Results
Ligament Efficiency Calculations
When the side plates have uniform or multi diameter holes, ligament efficiency calculations are performed according to Section 13-6. For the case of uniform diameter holes, the ligament efficiency factors em and eb for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are considered to be the same. In the case of multi diameter holes (see Figure M), the neutral axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid thickness of the plate; in this case, for bending loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other surface. If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies, the calculated stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is important to note that if the stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then the calculations for the allowable stresses will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incorrectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the allowables at the same time.
Reinforcement Calculations
The reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures D, E, and J), are discussed in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses those vessels in which the reinforcement on opposite side plates has the same moment of inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4 and B2 is assumed to be continuous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous. The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing member center lines. Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using this maximum value, equations (1a)-(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum value for both the long and short-side plates. The minimum calculated value shall be considered the maximum distance between reinforcement center lines. In addition to the above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked. Specifically, the width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch. Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and reinforcement) is determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calculations are performed for locations where the plate is in compression, and then also performed for locations where the plate is in tension. Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to calculate the maximum width of the shell plate which can be used to compute the effective moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in compression. At locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch distance is used in the computations.
Stress Calculations
The stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The calculations are performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side plates. These actual stress values are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form. A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress, while a negative (-) stress indicates compressive stress. As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are adjusted by the ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint efficiency E. At the mid-side locations, the stresses are increased by dividing the calculated value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency. In the event that the plates have holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E, there is no adjustment to the stress calculations, rather the allowables are adjusted by the value E.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-19
Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are used in the M.A.W.P. calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on end plates is performed if a thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are performed per UG-34 with a C factor entered by the user. These stresses are not used in the computation of the MAWP.
Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced members the program compares the membrane stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress. Note also that when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculation as necessary. Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced members the program compares the actual stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note also that when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.
MAWP Calculations
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for each of the three stress types. The computation of the M.A.W.P. is performed by setting the stress equations equal to the allowables, and solving for P. The minimum computed P value is considered to be the maximum allowable working pressure for the particular stress type. When analyzing vessels A7-B or A8-B (Figures G and H stayed by bars), an additional pressure rating is computed. If the long-side height is greater than the pitch of the stay bars, then a pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG47 with the long-side height substituted for the pitch. If this value of pressure is less than the previously calculated M.A.W.P.s, then this becomes the vessel pressure rating. Similarly for vessel B3-B (Figure K stayed by bars), if (L2 + R/2) is greater than the pitch, then an additional pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with (L2 + R/2) substituted for the pitch.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
27-20
RECTANGULAR VESSELS
Example Problem
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 8
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-2
WRC 297/ANNEX G
Introduction
The WRC 297/Annex G analysis module performs local stress calculations on cylinder to cylinder attachments according to the Welding Research Council's bulletin number 297 or PD 5500, Annex G. Additionally, it also analyzes cylinder on a sphere, solid attachment on either a cylinder on a sphere, per PD 5500 Annex G.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-3
Description
Enter a maximum 15 character alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Vessel Diameter
Type the actual diameter of the vessel using the Id or OD as specified above.
Design Pressure
The design pressure will be used to compute membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel wall. It will also be used to compute axial pressure thrust if instructed to do so.
Design Temperature
This is design temperature for the vessel. This value is used to look up allowable stresses for the vessel and nozzle materials from the ASME Section II Part D material table.
Vessel Material
The vessel material can be typed in or selected from the Material Database. Right click on this field to access the properties for this material or access the database.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-4
WRC 297/ANNEX G
This stress concentration factor is not used in any way with the pressure stress calculations. This input is only active when WRC 297 method is selected.
Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment. If WRC 297 method is selected then only round attachment type (a cylinder) permissible. If PD5500, Annex G is selected than the option include, round, square or rectangular.
Diameter of Nozzle
Type the actual inside or outside diameter of the nozzle as appropriate.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-5
Torsional Moment MT
Type the torsional moment in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance with the convention used, either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should clarify these conventions.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance with the convention used, either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should clarify these conventions. Note that this moment has opposite signs in these conventions.
Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should clarify these conventions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-6
WRC 297/ANNEX G
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-8
WRC 297/ANNEX G
If the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical head or is in a spherical head then check this box. If you are entering this data manually ensure that you are entering the spherical diameter. This is especially important for nozzles located in elliptical heads. Checking this box causes the program to access the various curves used to compute the spherical factors for nozzles connected to spheres per ANNEX G.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-9
Sample Calculation
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28-10
WRC 297/ANNEX G
Discussion of Results
The WRC 297 Stress Evaluation method computes stress intensities in the nozzle and vessel wall at the junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different points. Typically, stress intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at operating temperature. However, you should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for further clarification and evaluation of stress results. Since this method produces quite a bit of output, it may be useful to use the option to produce only the summary of results. To do this use the TOOLS/CONFIGURATION option (Miscellaneous tab) and check the appropriate box to produce the results in a summary fashion. Note that this directive will affect all of the generated reports in the file.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
2 9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
29-2
Appendix Y
Introduction
This module performs stress evaluations of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form identical flange pairs. This module conforms to the latest version of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y, Edition 2004 A-05.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 29 Appendix Y
29-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
29-4
Appendix Y
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Chapter 29 Appendix Y
29-5
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
3 0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-2
Miscellaneous Topics
Heading Edit
Heading Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the heading and the title page for the current job. The Set Title button is used to overlay a default title page into the title page text area. If desired this page can be customized by editing the file Title.Hed. This is an ASCII Text file and can modified with Notepad, Edit or any other ASCII text editor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-3
Material Database
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-4
Miscellaneous Topics
Click OK to load the material name and the appropriate material parameters are loaded in the element. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the Material Edit Window by pressing Enter when the cursor is in the Material field. The Material Edit Window lets you display and modify the material properties of the current element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are directly from the program's material database, otherwise the data are from the data structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in the program's material database, the program will assume that is a "user-defined material", in this case the you must define all material properties in this window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-5
The following buttons are available in this window: OK - Allows you to save the data to the memory then close the window. Cancel - Allows you to close the window without saving the data. Help - Displays information about this window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-6
Miscellaneous Topics
Discussion of Input
Input Data
Material Name
Enter the name of the material for this element. This program contains a database which includes most of the materials in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
TEMA Number
The TEMA number is used to determine the modulus of elasticity for a material at design temperature. These values range from 1 to 52 and are located in the TEMA Tubesheet chapter.
Keyboard Commands
The following movements are defined for the keyboard within the program:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-7
Begin line Begin list Delete character Delete prev. char Delete window End line End list Exit Help Hot key Insert toggle Left word Mark Maximize Menu control Minimize Move window Next cell Next Character Next field Next window Page down Page up Previous cell Previous character Previous field Refresh Right word Select Size window System button
<Home> <Home> <Del.> <Backspace> <Alt+F4> <End> <End> <Shift+F3> <F1> <Alt+char(with '_')> <Ins> <Ctrl+left-arrow> <Ctrl+F5> <Alt +> <Alt> <Alt -> <Alt+F7> <Down_arrow> <Right_arrow> <Tab> <Alt+F6> <Page Down> <Page Up> <Up_arrow> <Left_arrow> <Shift+Tab> <F5> <Ctrl+right_arrow> <Enter> <Alt+F8> <Alt .>
Mouse Operation
The following movements are defined for the mouse within the program:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-8
Miscellaneous Topics
In Window Objects:
Choose <Left-down-click> Select <Left-release>
In Vessel Graphics:
Select element <Left-release> Select detail <Right-down-click>
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-9
material at ambient temperature, and enter it into this cell. The program will also determine the stress when you select a material name from the Material Selection window. There is an option for PVElite to always use 0.9 times the yield stress when determining the hydrostatic test allowable stress. This check box is on the Design/Analysis Constraints screen.
P Number Thickness
Enter the thickness for the P number. Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness above which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is based on the P number for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code. If a seam is partially radiographed and the required thickness exceeds the P number thickness, PVElite will automatically change the joint efficiency to 1.0 as stated in the Code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-10
Miscellaneous Topics
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
30-12
Miscellaneous Topics
NFN-12 NFN-13 NFN-14 NFN-15 NFN-16 NFN-17 NFN-18 NFN-19 NFN-20 NFT-1 NFT-2 NFT-3 NFZ-1 NFZ-2
UNF-28.36, Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, etc. UNF-28.37, Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330 UNF-28.38, Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4 UNF-28.39, Ni Mo Alloy X UNF-28.40, Ni Mo Alloy B-2 UNF-28.44, Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625) UNF-28.45, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3) UNF-28.46, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3, >3/4) UNF-28.47, Work Hardened Nickel UNF-28.22, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1 UNF-28.28, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2 UNF-28.42, Titanium, Grade 1 UNF-28.35, Zirconium, Alloy 702 UNF-28.41, Zirconium, Alloy 705
You may add material data to the standard Material Database using the Edit/Add Materials option from Tools on the Main Menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
CH AP TER
3 1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
31-2
Vessel Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation directory/Examples directory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
Index 1
1.60D.5 6-1 1.60D10 6-1 1.60D2 6-1 1.60D5 6-1 1.60D7 6-1
3
3D Viewer 3-1
A
A Road Map for PVELITE 3-3 About the Documentation 1-9 Above Ground Height 6-1 Absolute 6-1 Abutting Nozzle Insertion 5-1 Acc Based Factor Fv 6-1 Acc.Based Factor Fa 6-1 Acceleration Zone 6-1 ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER 2 Acts During Wind or Seismic 5-33 Actual Diameter and Thickness 5-15 Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness 12-14 Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle 5-15, 12-7 Actual Schedule of Nozzle 12-8 Actual Thickness of Flange 15-6 Actual Thickness of Head 15-5 Actual Thickness of Nozzle 5-15 Actual Thickness of Shell 12-6 AD-540.2 sketch b 3-1 Adding Details 3-1, 3-46 Additional Reinforcing Pad Data 5-27 Additional Area 16-8, 19-6 Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad 5-1 Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G 28-7 Allowable Calculations 27-19 Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 124, 15-5, 17-6 Allowable Stress At Ambient Temperature 164 Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 12-4, 15-5, 17-7 Allowable Stress At Operating Temperature 16-3 Also Perform Soehren's Calculation? 15-12 Printed on 15 December, 2005
Amplification Factor ac 6-1 Analysis 3-11 Analysis Menu 10-8 Analysis, Performing an 10-1 Analyze Menu 3-1, 3-25, 10-1 Analyzing Heat Exchangers 9-4 Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details 3-55 Angle Between Nozzle and Shell 5-1, 5-13 Angle Between Nozzle and Shell (Usually 90) entered in descript 5-1 Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way 6-1 ANSI Flange MAWP 7-1 API 579 Introduction 11-14 Appendix 14 Large Opening 4-15 Appendix Y 29-1 Apply Longitudinal Loads to Vessel 16-5 Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel 16-5 Apply Wind Loads to Vessel 16-5 Are There Axial Forces on the Cone? 14-6 Area 2 Setting 5-1 Area Calculations for Small Nozzles 10-1 Area Of Tube Layout 17-11 Area1 Setting 5-1 ASCE 6-1 ASCE - 95 Seismic Data 6-50 ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data 6-1, 6-42 ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor 6-1 ASCE 7-93 Seismic Data 6-1 ASCE 95 Wind Data 6-1, 6-24 ASCE Roughness Factor 6-1 ASCE Wind Data 6-1, 6-18 ASCE7-93 Seismic Data 6-44 ASCE-95 Seismic Data 6-1 ASME Code Weld Type 5-1, 5-27 ASME TUBESHEETS 24-1 ASME UG-99(b) 6-1 ASME UG-99(b) footnote 32 6-1 ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34 6-1 ASME UG-99(c) 6-1 Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads 16-15 Assigning Detail 5-4 Assigning Details to Elements 5-1 Attachment Factor 4-14 Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring 14-9
B
B16.5 Flange 5-1 B16.5 Flange, Grade for Attached 5-1 Back Ring Actual Thickness 15-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Backing Ring Inside Diameter 15-13 Bar Thickness 6-1 Base Elevation 6-1 Base Plate Length 16-7 Base Plate Thickness 16-7 Base Plate Width 16-7 BASE RINGS 4-21, 21-1 Baseplate Input 19-22 Baseplate Length 5-1, 5-38 Baseplate Results 19-25 Baseplate Thickness 5-1, 5-39 Baseplate Width 5-1, 5-38 Basering Analysis 4-21 Basering Dialog 4-19 Basic Wind Speed 16-10, 19-8 Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement 3-1 Body Flange 4-16 Bolt Correction Factor 3-1 Bolt Root Area 15-13 Bolted Cover Mating Flange 9-47 Bottom Lug Support Plate, Length of 5-1 Bottom Plate, Thickness of 5-1 Bottom Support Plate 5-1 British Standard BS5500 7-1 British Wind Code BS-6399 6-37 Brownell and Young Method of Design 4-21 Building Heat Exchangers 9-11
C
Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads 10-1 Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results 7-3 Calculations 21-3 Calculator 3-35 Carbon Steel Materials 30-10 Category Value 6-1 Center Web Height 5-1 Centerline Dimension 5-1 Centerline Dimension (B) 5-37 Centerline Offset 4-1, 4-23 Channel Corrosion Allowance 17-8 Channel Design Pressure 17-7 Channel Inside Diameter 17-8 Channel Metal Design Temperature 17-8 Channel Wall Thickness 17-8 Check Saddle Webs, & Base Plate 16-5 Class for Attached B16.5 Flange 5-13, 12-11 COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers 112
Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design 6-1 Code Case 2260/2261 3-1 Coefficient Cd 6-1 Combination Method 6-1 Component Analysis 7-1, 7-11, 8-2, 8-5 Component Analysis Main Menu 10-1 Component Analysis Module 10-1 Component Analysis Tutorial 10-1 Componsite Stiffener Height 5-1 Computation Control Tab 10-1 Cone Actual Thickness 14-5 Cone Axial Length 14-6 Cone Corrosion Allowance 14-5 Cone Description 14-4 Cone Diameter at Large End 14-5 Cone Diameter at Small End 14-5 Cone Diameter Basis (ID, OD) 14-5 Cone Half Apex Angle 14-6 Cone Joint Efficiency 14-5 Cone Length 4-11 Cone Number 14-4 Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name 14-4 Configuration 10-1 Conical Head or Shell Segment 4-11 CONICAL SECTIONS 14-1 Construction Type 6-1 Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate 17-16 Corroded Hydrotest 6-1 Corrosion Allowance 4-5, 16-3 Create / Review Units 3-33 Crest Distance 6-1 Critical Damping Ratio 6-1 Cross Sectional Area 5-10 Cross Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section 14-9 Cross Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring 16-14 Cross-Sectional Area 5-1 Crown Radius 4-10 Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads 16-15 Cylindrical Shell 4-8
D
Damping Factor 6-1 Datum Line Distance 6-1 Default units file 10-1 Defining the Basic Vessel 3-45 Defining the Details 5-7 Density of Lining 5-49 Density of Liquid on Tray 5-40
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
Density of Material 30-9 Density of Packing 5-44 Density Of Stored Liquid 16-4 Depth of Groove in Tubesheet 17-14 Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel 5-17, 12-12 Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck 5-27 Depth of Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Neck 12-13 Description 12-4, 17-6 Design and Analysis of Vessel Details 3-15 Design Data 6-1, 6-3 Design External Pressure 4-7, 12-4 Design Internal Pressure 4-6, 6-1, 12-4 Design Internal Temperature 6-1 Design Modification 6-1, 6-11 Design Pressure 6-1 Design Pressure + Static Head 6-1 Design Temperature 15-4 Design Temperature for External Pressure 4-7 Design Temperature for Internal Pressure 4-6 Design Wind Speed 6-1 Detail Definition Buttons 5-1, 5-5 Detail ID 5-1 Details, Definition of 5-1 Diagnostic Menu 10-20 Diagnostics Menu 3-1, 3-36, 10-1 Diameter and Thickness, Actual 5-1 Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-1 Diameter of Bolt Circle 15-6 Diameter of Nozzle, Actual 5-1 Diameter of Outer Tube Limit Circle 17-11 Diamter, Minimum 5-1 Differential Design Pressure (Used if > 0.0) 1710 DISCLAIMER 4 Discussion of Input 16-3, 18-3, 19-3, 20-3, 219, 21-17, 30-6 Discussion of Input Data 5-50, 11-5, 11-18, 124, 13-5, 14-4, 15-4, 17-6, 22-4, 23-4, 24-4, 254, 26-4, 27-10, 28-3 Discussion of Results 4-24, 11-27, 12-14, 1318, 14-10, 15-14, 16-16, 17-31, 18-18, 21-18, 23-10, 24-26, 25-7, 27-18, 28-10 Distance between Gussets 5-1, 5-30 Distance from Outside Diameter or Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-41 Distance From Saddle to Vessel Tangent 16-6
Distance From the Flange Centroid to Head Centerline 15-12 Distance From Vessel Centerline To Saddle Base 16-5 Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint 5-1, 5-29 Distance or Straight Flange Length 4-4 Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section 14-9, 16-14 Distance to Crest (Lh) 16-11, 19-9 Distance to Ring Centroid 5-1, 5-10 Distance to Site 6-1 Distance to Site (x) 16-11, 19-9 Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0 5-14 DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime 3-61 DXF File Generation Option 3-1, 3-58
E
E for Plates 5-38 Earthquake Load Calculation 7-1 EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv 6-1 Edit / Add Materials 3-33 Edit Menu 10-1, 10-7 Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits 12-15 Efficiency of Shell Seam Through Which Nozzle Passes 12-8 EigenSolver 3-1 El Centro 6-1 Element Additional Data 4-8 Element Basic Data 4-3 Element Data 4-1 Element's Diameter 4-4 Element's From Node 4-1, 4-3 Element's To Node 4-1, 4-4 Elliptical Head 4-8 Enter Required Thickness 12-6 Enter the Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads 1211 Enter The Attachment Factor For Welded Flat Heads 12-11 Enter the Large Diameter for Non-circular Flat Heads 12-11 Enter the Shell Design Length for External Pressure 12-10 Enter Tube-Tubesheet Joint Information 17-9 Enter Unsupported Tube Span SL For Max (k*SL) 17-10 Entering PVElite 3-44
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
ENTIRE AGREEMENT 3 Equipment Class 6-1 Error Checking 3-1, 3-10, 7-1 ESL Installation on a Network 2-11 ESL Menu 3-1, 3-42, 10-1, 10-22 Example 11-28, 12-17, 13-22, 14-12, 15-16, 16-20, 17-36, 18-27, 19-30, 20-9, 21-19, 2211, 23-11, 24-28, 25-9, 29-5 Example Problem 26-5, 27-20 Expansion Joint Data 9-28 Expansion Joint Design Option 17-16 Expansion Joint Inside Diameter 17-16 Expansion Joint Knuckle 17-17 Expansion Joint Type 17-15 Exposure Constant 6-1 External Design Pressure 14-4 External Design Temperature 14-4 External Pressure calculations 7-1 External Pressure Calculations 27-19 External Pressure Chart Name 30-9 External Pressure Results 14-10 External Pressure Results for Heads: 15-14 External Software Lock 2-4 Extra Weight 16-4
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction 5-1, 5-33 Force Modification Factor 6-1 Force/Moment Combination Method 5-33 Forces and Moments 5-1, 5-33 Friction Coefficient Between the Saddle and the Foundation, mu 16-13 From Node 5-1 Full Face Gasket Options 15-6
G
Gasket and Gasket Factors 29-4 Gasket Inner Diameter 15-8 Gasket Outer Diameter 15-8 Gasket Thickness 15-11 GENERAL 4 General Vessel Data 6-1 Generating Output 8-2 Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange 5-13, 12-12 Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel 5-1 Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck 51 Gussets 5-1 Gussets Height 5-1 Gussets, Mean Width 5-1 Gussets, Thickness of 5-1 Gust Response Factor 6-1
F
Failure Path Calculations 12-16 FEA Additional Input 18-16 File Manager 30-1 File Menu 3-1, 3-22, 10-1, 10-5 Finished Thickness 4-5 Fireproofing with Insulation 5-1 Flange Analysis 4-16 Flange Distance to Top 6-1 Flange Face Facing Sketch 15-11 Flange Face Inner Diameter 15-8 Flange Face Outer Diameter 15-7 Flange Input Data 4-20 Flange Material 5-28 Flange Merge 17-14 Flange Type 5-28 FLANGES 4-16, 4-20, 13-1 Floating Head Description 15-4 Floating Head Identification Number 15-4 Floating Head Type (b, c, d) 15-4 FLOATING HEADS 15-1 Floating Tubesheets 9-36 Flohead Calculation 10-1 Force Coefficient (Cf) 16-8, 19-6 Force Factor 6-1
H
Half Apex Angle 4-12 Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections 12-11 Half Pipe Jacket 5-50 HALF-PIPES 25-1 Head Factor 4-8 Head Joint Efficiency 16-6 Head Thickness 16-6 Head Type 16-6 Heading Edit 30-2 Heading Manipulation and Material Properties 30-3 HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-1 Heat Treated Materials 30-10 Heat-Treated Materials 30-10 Height above Ground 6-1 Height of Center Web 5-1, 5-39, 16-8 Height of Composite Stiffener 5-1, 5-38 Height of Gussets 5-1, 5-30 Height of Hill (H) 6-1 Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) 16-11, 19-9 Height of Liquid Column, Operating 12-5 Height of Liquid on Tray 5-1, 5-40
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
Height of Packed Section 5-1, 5-43 Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface 16-15 Height of Vessel Above Grade 16-11, 19-9 Height/Length of Insulation 5-1 Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing 5-47 Height/Length of Lining 5-1, 5-49 Height/Length of Liquid 5-1, 5-45 Help Menu 3-1, 3-43, 10-1, 10-23 Higher Long Stresses 6-1 Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations 27-19 Hill Height 6-1 Hills, Types of 6-1 Hillside Nozzle Cylinder 5-21 Hillside Nozzle in Head 5-26 HOOPS' License Grant 4 Horizontal Force Factor 6-1 HORIZONTAL VESSELS 16-1 Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N) 6-1 Hydrotest Calculations 7-1 Hydrotest Position 6-1 Hydrotest Type 6-1 Hydrotest, Seismic 6-1 Hydrotest, Wind 6-1
I
IBC 6-1 IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters 6-54 Impact Factor 6-1 Importance Factor 6-1 Importance Factor ( I ) 16-9, 19-7 Include Hydrostatic Head Component 12-5 Include Missing Mass Components 6-1 India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM 6-1, 6-49 Input Echo 7-1 Input Menu 3-1, 3-18 Input Processor 3-1 Input Processors 3-1 Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle 5-16, 12-8 Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Head 12-11 Inside Crown Radius of Head 15-5 Inside Depth of Flange From Flange Face to Attached Head 15-13 Inside Diameter at Base 4-18 Inside Diameter of Flange 15-6 Inside Diameter of Ring 5-1, 5-9 Inside Head Depth 4-9
Inside Knuckle Radius of Torispherical Head 12-11 Inspecting the Model in 3D 3-40 Installation Options 6-1, 6-8 Installing PVElite 2-7 Insulation 5-1, 5-47 Insulation Density 5-1, 5-47 Insulation or Fireproofing, Thickness of 5-1 Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head: 15-14 Internal Design Pressure 14-4 Internal Design Temperature 14-4 Internal Pressure 6-1 Internal Pressure Calculations 7-1 Internal Pressure Results 14-10 Internal Pressure Results for the Head: 15-14 Internal Temperature 6-1 Introduction 1-1, 4-2, 5-2, 5-50, 6-2, 7-2, 9-2, 11-2, 12-2, 13-2, 14-2, 15-2, 16-2, 17-2, 18-2, 19-2, 20-2, 21-2, 22-2, 23-2, 24-2, 25-2, 26-2, 27-2, 28-2, 29-2 Invoking the Drawing 3-1, 3-61 IS 875 Wind Code 6-1, 6-27 Is the Flange Slotted 15-12 Is The Nozzle Outside the 80% Diameter Limit 12-6 Is There A Backing Ring? 15-12 Is This a Heat Exchanger 6-1 Is This a Manway or Access/Inspection Opening 12-6 Is this a Welded Internal 5-32 Item Number 16-3, 17-6 Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area , And UG45 12-16
J
Jacket 11-8, 11-29 Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams 4-6 Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck 5-1, 5-16 Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes 5-1, 5-16
K
Keyboard Commands 30-6 Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End 14-9 Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End 14-9 Knuckle Radius 4-10 Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads 16-15 Knuckle Thickness, Large End 14-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
L
Large Cylinder Actual Thickness 14-7 Large Cylinder Axial Length 14-7 Large Cylinder Corrosion Allowance 14-7 Large Cylinder Joint Efficiency 14-7 Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations 12-15 Large End Knuckle Radius 4-12 Large End Knuckle Thickness 4-13 Large End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section) 147 LARGE OPENINGS 26-1 Lateral Nozzle in Cylinder 5-23 Leg Orientation 5-1, 5-41 Leg Results 19-14 Legs 5-1, 5-41 LEGS and LUGS 19-1 Legs, Length of 5-1 Legs, Number of 5-1 Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate 5-30 Length of Expanded Portion of Tube 17-10 Length of Legs 5-42 Length of Partition Gasket 15-11 LICENSE GRANT 2 Lifting Lug Input 19-18 Ligament Efficiency Calculations 27-18 Liguid on Tray 5-1 LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES 3 LIMITED WARRANTY 3 Lining 5-1, 5-49 Lining Density 5-1 Lining, Thickness of 5-1 Liquid 5-1, 5-45 Liquid Density 5-1, 5-45 Liquid Height From Bottom Of Tank 16-4 Liquid on Tray, Density of 5-1 Load Case 6-1 Load Cases 9-32 Loads and Design Constraints 3-1 Local Shell Thickness 5-1, 5-17 Location of Reinforcing Ring (Shell, Cone) 149 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses 7-1 Longitudinal Stress Constants 7-1 Longitudinal Stresses 7-1 Lug Bearing Width 5-1, 5-29 Lug Distances from Base 6-1 Lug Height 5-1
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring 4-1 Lug Height (only if no Top Ring) 4-23 Lug Midpoint 5-1 Lug Thickness 4-1, 4-23 Lug Width 5-1 Lugs 5-1, 5-29
M
M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-1 Main Input Fields 5-51, 11-5, 12-4, 13-5, 14-4, 15-4, 16-3, 17-6, 18-3, 19-3, 20-3, 21-9, 22-4, 23-4, 24-4, 25-4, 26-4, 27-10, 28-3 Main Menu 3-1, 3-21, 10-4 Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 14-5 Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 14-4 Material Definition 30-3 Material Name 4-5, 30-6 Material Specification 15-4, 16-3 Material Yield Stress 5-1, 5-38 Mating Flange Design Bolt Load (W) 15-13 Mating Flange Loads? 15-12 Mating Flange Operating Load (WM1) 15-13 Mating Flange Seating Load (WM2) 15-13 MAWP Calculations 27-19 Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl 6-1 Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss 6-1 Maximum Allowable Pressure New & Cold 12-4 Mean Width of Gussets 5-1, 5-30 Merge Shell 16-5 Metal Temperature 6-1 Mexican Wind Code 1993 6-30 Minimum Design Metal Temperature 12-15 Minimum Diameter and Thickness 5-1, 5-15 Minimum Metal Temperature 6-1 Miscellaneous Tab 10-1 Miscellaneous Topics 30-1 Miscellaneous Weight 5-32 Modification of Reinforcement Limit 12-6 Modification of Reinforcing Limits 5-14 Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis 5-1, 5-33 Moment of Inertia 5-1, 5-9 Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section 14-9 Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring 16-14 Moment Reduction Factor Tau 6-1 Mouse Operation 30-6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
N
Name of Section Type 5-10 Natural Frequency Calculation 7-1 Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) Optional (Hz) 19-9 NBC Seismic Data 6-1, 6-47 NBC Wind Data 6-1, 6-22 Network Installation / Usage 2-10 Nominal Density of Material 30-9 Nominal Density of this Material 30-9 Nominal Diameter and Thickness 5-1, 5-15 Nominal Schedule of Nozzle 5-1, 5-16 Nominal Thickness of Nozzle 12-8 Non Ferrous Materials 30-11 Non-Circ. Small Diameter 4-15 Non-Ferrous Materials 30-11 Notes on Network ESLs 2-12 Novell File Server ESL Installation 2-11 Novell Workstation ESL Installation 2-11 Nozzle Analysis 5-1, 5-12 Nozzle Angle Geometry 12-9 Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 5-1, 5-16, 12-8 Nozzle Description 5-1, 5-13 Nozzle Design Modifications 6-1, 6-14 Nozzle Design Pressure 6-1 Nozzle Dialog Data 5-11 Nozzle Diameter Basis 5-1, 5-15, 12-7 Nozzle Diameter Limit 5-1 Nozzle In a Cylinder 5-20 Nozzle In a Head 5-24 Nozzle Input Data 5-1, 5-13 Nozzle Insertion 5-1 Nozzle Inside Projection 5-1, 5-17, 12-13 Nozzle Material Specification 5-1, 5-14 Nozzle Orientation 5-18 Nozzle Outside Projection 5-1, 5-16, 12-12 Nozzle Schedule 5-1 Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis 5-1, 5-15, 127 Nozzle Thickness 3-1, 10-1 Nozzle Thickness Limit 5-1 Nozzle Weight 5-1 Nozzle, Thickness of Actual 5-1 Nozzles 5-1 NOZZLES 12-1 Nozzles, Small 3-1 Nubbin Width 15-11 Number of Bolts 15-6 Number of Desired Cycles 17-18
Number of Flexible Shell Elements 17-18 Number of Grooves 17-11 Number of Legs 5-42 Number of Lugs 5-31 Number of Ribs 5-39, 16-7 Number of Splits in Backing Ring (0, 1, OR 2) 15-13 Number of Trays 5-40 Number of Tube Holes 17-9
O
OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick 31 Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline 5-1 Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1) 5-13 Offset from Centerline 5-1, 5-32 Operating Liquid Density 12-5 Optional Steps 7-9 Ordinate Type 6-1 Other Input Processors 3-7 Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint 17-18 Output 19-21, 20-8 Output Menu 3-1, 3-26, 10-1, 10-9 Output Review 3-1 Output Review and Report Generation 3-13 Output/Review 8-1 Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion 15-5 Outside Diameter of Ring 5-1, 5-9 Outside Diamter 5-1 Overall Height of Lug 5-30 Overall M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-1 Overall Width of Lug 5-30 Overriding Nozzle Weight 5-18 Overview 2-2
P
P instead of MAWP for UG-99B 10-1 P Number Thickness 30-9 Packed Section Height 5-1 Packing 5-1, 5-43 Packing Density 5-1 Pad Length 5-1, 5-31 Pad Material 5-1, 5-27 Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface 51, 5-27 Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface 12-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Pad Thickness 5-1, 5-27, 5-31, 12-13 Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter 5-1, 527 Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter 12-13 Pad Width 5-1, 5-27, 5-31 Parameters, Required 3-1 Partition Gasket Column for Gasket Seating: 15-12 Partition Gasket Design Seating Stress Y: 1512 Partition Gasket Factor M 15-11 Partition Gasket Nubbin Width 15-12 Partition Gasket Thickness 15-12 Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles 12-7 Perform Saddle Check 5-38 Perform Tailing Lug Analysis 4-23 Perform WRC 107 Calc 5-1, 5-31 Performance Criteria Factor P 6-1 Performing an Analysis 10-24 Performing the Analysis 3-53 Perimeter Of Tube Layout (if Needed) 17-10 Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit 5-14, 12-12 Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit 5-14, 12-12 Pin Hole Diameter 4-1, 4-23 PIPES and PADS 20-1 Plates 5-1 Platform Clearance 5-1, 5-35 Platform End Angle (degrees) 5-1, 5-34 Platform Force Coefficient 5-1, 5-35 Platform Grating Weight 5-1, 5-35 Platform Height 5-1, 5-35 Platform Length 5-1 Platform Length (Non- Circular) 5-36 Platform Railing Weight 5-1, 5-35 Platform Start Angle (degrees) 5-1, 5-34 Platform Weight 5-1, 5-35 Platform Width 5-1, 5-35 Platform Wind Area 5-1, 5-35 Platform Wind Area Calculation 5-1 Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options] 5-35 Platforms 5-1, 5-34 Plotting the Vessel Image 3-1 Pop-up Input Fields 11-8, 21-14 Pop-Up Input Fields 12-10, 13-14, 14-8, 15-13, 16-7, 17-18, 18-8, 19-6, 19-10, 20-5, 22-8, 239, 24-16, 27-14
Pre-1999 Addenda 10-1 Precautionary Note 9-49 Pressure Chart Name, External 30-9 Print Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure 12-11 Printing Equations and Substitutions 3-1 Printing or Saving Reports to a File 10-1, 10-31 Printing the Graphics 10-31 Printing the Reports 10-1, 10-31 Printing Water Volume in Gallons 3-1, 10-1 Printout in Rows, External 10-1 Program Structure and Control 3-1, 3-2 Program Support / User Assistance 1-10 Projection from Bottom 6-1 Projection from Top 6-1 Purpose of this Chapter 10-2 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis 5-50, 9-3, 11-3, 14-3, 15-3, 22-3, 26-3, 27-3 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 11-15, 123, 13-3, 17-3, 24-3, 25-3, 29-3 PVElite Analysis 7-1 PVElite Quick Start 3-44 PVElite Startup 3-1
Q
Quick Start with PVElite 3-1
R
Radial Nozzle in Cylinder 5-21 Radial Nozzle in Head 5-25, 5-26 Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate 5-1, 529 Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring 14-9 Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring 5-1, 5-30 Radiography, Degree of 6-1 Range Type 6-1 Rating of attached flange 12-7 Recording the Model 3-1 Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image 3-47 RECTANGULAR VESSELS 27-1 Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings 6-1 Reinforcement Calculations 27-18 Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure 14-11 Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure 14-10 Reinforcing Limits, Modification of 5-1 Reinforcing Pad 12-9 Reloading last file at Startup 10-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
Report Content 10-1 Report Generation 3-1 Required and Available Areas 12-14 Required Parameters, Setting Up 3-1 Required Thickness Calculations: 15-14 Required Thickness of Nozzle 12-8 Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle 12-14 Response Modification Factor R 6-1 Response Modification R 6-1 Response Spectrum 6-1, 6-56 Response Spectrum Name 6-1 Results 11-12 Results for a Whole Vessel 10-1 Review 8-2 Review Screen 8-2 Reviewing the Results 3-1, 3-54 Reviewing the Results - The Output Option 101, 10-30 Rib Thickness 5-1, 5-39 Ribs, Number of 5-1 Rigging Data 6-1 Ring Centroid Distance 5-1 Ring Diameter, Outside 5-1 Ring Inside Diameter 5-1 Ring Material 5-1, 5-9 Ring, Thickness of 5-1 Rings 5-1, 5-8 Risk Factor 6-1 Roughness Factor 6-1 Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size? 3-1 Running the Analysis 3-1
S
Saddle Bearing Angle 16-6 Saddle Check 5-1 Saddle Contact Angle 5-1 Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) 5-38 Saddle Dimension A 5-1, 5-38 Saddle Reaction Force Factor 16-4 Saddle Wear Plate Design 16-17 Saddle Width 16-6 Saddles 5-1, 5-37 Sample Calculation 28-9 Section Identifier 5-1, 5-42 Section Type 5-1 Seismic 5-1 Seismic Coefficient Av 6-1 Seismic Coefficient Ca 6-1 Seismic Coefficient Cc 6-1 Seismic Coefficient Cv 6-1
Seismic Data 6-1, 6-41 Seismic Design Category 6-1 Seismic Design Code 6-1 Seismic for Hydrotest 6-1 Seismic for Hydrotest, Percent 6-1 Seismic Load Input in G's 6-1, 6-51 Seismic Zone 6-1, 16-11, 19-10 Select the Addenda for the Material Database 10-1 Selection of Reinforcing Pad 12-15 Set Area 1 or Area 2 Equal To 0 12-7 Setting Up the Required Parameters 3-59 Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake 7-1 Shell and Head Diameter Basis 16-5 Shell Corrosion Allowance 12-6, 17-7 Shell Cylinder Length (Li) 17-18 Shell Design Pressure 17-6 Shell Diameter 12-5, 16-6 Shell Diameter Basis (ID or OD) 12-5 Shell Inside Diameter 17-7 Shell Joint Efficiency 16-6 Shell Length Tangent toTangent 16-6 Shell Mean Metal Temperature 17-7 Shell Metal Design Temperature 17-7 Shell or Head Type 12-5 Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance 155 Shell Side (External) Design Pressure 15-4 Shell Thickness 16-6 Shell Thickness, Modification of 6-1 Shell Tr Value 5-1, 5-17 Shell Wall Thickness 17-7 Shell, Nozzle or Pad Material Name 12-4 Shell\Channel Tube\Tubesheet\ Bolt Material Specification 17-6 SHELLS 11-1 Shock Scale X|Y dir 6-1 Site Distance 6-1 Skirt Support with Basering 4-17 Small Cylinder Actual Thickness 14-6 Small Cylinder Axial Length 14-6 Small Cylinder Corrosion Allowance 14-6 Small Cylinder Joint Efficiency 14-6 Small End Knuckle Radius 4-13 Small End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section) 146 Soehren's Calculations: 15-14 Software Installation on a Network Drive 2-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10
Soil Factor 6-1 Soil Type 6-1 Special Service 6-1 Specifying Global Data 3-1 Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints 3-49 Spherical Cover / Backing Device 9-42 Spherical Head 4-11 SRSS 6-1 Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials 30-10 Standard Bar Ring 6-1 Starting CodeCalc from PVElite 10-3 Starting the Alternative Nozzle Layout Method 5-19 Starting the Installation Procedure 2-5 Steps for Calculating and Displaying VesselAnalysis Results 7-1 Stiffener Type 6-1 Stiffening Ring Location 16-14 Stiffening Ring Material Properties 16-14 Stiffening Ring Present 16-5 Stiffening Ring Properties 16-14 Stiffening Rings for External Pressure, Selecting 6-1 Straight Length of Tubes 17-10 Stress Calculations 27-18 Stress due to Combined Loads 7-1 Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel 10-32 Sump Head? 4-9, 4-10, 4-13 Support Lug Input 19-15 Swap Diameter Basis 4-7 System and Hardware Requirements 2-3
T
Tail Lug Type 4-1, 4-23 Tailing Lug Analysis 4-1, 4-22, 21-16 Tailing Lug Input Data 4-23 Take Cone as Lines of Support for External Pressure? 14-8 Tapped Hole Area Loss 5-1, 5-17 TEMA Classification 17-15 TEMA Number 30-6 TERM 2 Terrain Category 6-1 The Input Processor 3-4 The Installation/Configuration Process 2-1 The Review Screen 8-3 THICK JOINTS 23-1 Thickness of Bottom Plate 5-30
Thickness of Gussets 5-30 Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing 5-47 Thickness of Lining 5-49 Thickness of Ribs 16-7 Thickness of Ring 5-9 Thickness of Top Plate/Ring 5-30 Thickness of Wear Plate 5-38 Thickness of Web 16-7 Thickness, Minimum 5-1 THIN JOINTS 22-1 Thread Series 15-6 To Node Diameter 4-11 Tools Menu 3-1, 3-12, 3-27, 10-1, 10-10 Top Plate/Ring 5-1 Top Plate/Ring, Thickness of 5-1 Toricone Dialog 4-12 Toriconical 4-12 Torispherical Head 4-10 Total Axial Force on Large End for External Pressure Case 14-8 Total Axial Force on Large End for Internal Pressure Case 14-8 Total Axial Force on Small End for External Pressure Case 14-8 Total Axial Force on Small End for Internal Pressure Case 14-8 Total weight and detail moment 7-1 Tower Deflection, Allowable 3-1 TRADEMARKS 5 Tray Spacing 5-1, 5-40 Tray Weight Per Unit Area 5-1, 5-40 Trays 5-1, 5-40 Trays, Number of 5-1 Trunnion Input 19-26 Trunnion Results 19-29 Tube Corrosion Allowance 17-9 Tube Design Temperature 17-8 Tube Hole Diameter 17-11 Tube Input Data 9-22 Tube Mean Metal Temperature 17-8 Tube Outside Diameter 17-9 Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square) 17-9 Tube Pitch 17-9 Tube Sheet Type 17-11 Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance 15-5 Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure 15-4 Tube Wall Thickness 17-9 Tubesheet Clamped 17-15 Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side 17-14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
11
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side 1714 Tubesheet Design Code 17-6 Tubesheet Extended as Flange? 17-14 Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both) 17-14 Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature 17-13 Tubesheet Properties 9-16 Tubesheet Thickness 17-14 Tubesheet Type and Design Code 9-11 TUBESHEETS 9-2, 17-1 Tutorial Problem Printout 10-1, 10-33 Tutorial/Master Menu 3-1 Types of Hill 16-11, 19-9
U
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data 6-1, 6-52 UBC Earthquake Importance Factor 6-1 UBC Horizontal Force Factor 6-1 UBC Near Source Factor 6-1 UBC Seismic Coefficient CA 6-1 UBC Seismic Coefficient CV 6-1 UBC Seismic Data 6-1, 6-45 UBC Seismic Zone 6-1 UBC Wind Data 6-1, 6-20 UBC Wind Importance Factor 6-1 UCS-66 Chart Number 30-9 UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness 1214 Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate 17-16 Updates 1-11 Use Code Case 2260? 10-1 Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only 3-1 User Border Creation 3-1, 3-59 User Defined 6-1 User Defined G for Floating Tubesheet 17-14 User Defined Longitudinal Force 16-13 User Defined Wind Pressure On Vessel 16-8, 19-6 User Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS 16-12, 19-11 User-Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure 6-1 User-Defined MAWP/MAPnc 6-1 User-Defined Wind Profile 6-1, 6-29 Using Review 8-4
Vessel Components (Details), Individual 3-1 Vessel Description 16-3 Vessel Design Pressure 16-3 Vessel Design Temperature 16-3 Vessel Detail Data 5-1 Vessel Details, Design and Analysis of 3-1 Vessel Example 31-2 Vessel Example Problems 31-1 Vessel Leg Input 19-12 Vessel OD 5-1 Vessel Translates During Occasional Load 542 Vessel, Basic Definition of 3-1 Vibration Period 6-1 View Menu 3-1, 3-37, 10-1, 10-21 Vortex Shedding 6-1
W
Wall Thickness for Axial Stress, Selecting 6-1 Wall Thickness for External Pressure, Selecting 6-1 Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure, Selecting 6-1 Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle 16-7 Wear Pad Thickness 16-7 Wear Pad Width 16-7 Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees) 5-1, 5-38 Wear Plate, Thickness of 5-1 Web Location 5-1, 5-39 Web Location Center or Side 16-8 Web Thickness 5-1, 5-39 Weight 5-1 Weight of Details 7-1 Weight of Elements 7-1 Weight of One Lug 5-1, 5-30 Weight, Miscellaneous 5-1, 6-1 Weights 5-32 Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell 5-1, 5-17, 12-12 Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad 5-1, 5-16, 12-13 Weld Size Calculations 12-15 Weld Size Thickness 4-1, 4-23 Weld Strength Calculations 12-16 Welded Flat Head 4-14 What Applications are Available? 1-5 What Distinguishes PVElite From our Competitors? 1-4 What is PVElite? 1-2
V
Velocity Zone 6-1 Vessel Analysis Calculations 7-1 Vessel Centerline, Distance or Offset 5-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12
What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite? 1-3 Width of Partition Gasket 15-11 Width of Saddle 5-1, 5-37 Width of Wear Plate 5-1, 5-38 Wind 5-1 Wind & Seismic Data 6-1, 6-16 Wind Data 6-1, 6-17 Wind Deflection 7-1 Wind Design Code 6-1 Wind Design Standard 16-8, 19-6 Wind Exposure 16-10, 19-8 Wind for Hydrotest 6-1 Wind Load Calculation 7-1 Wind Load Diameter Multiplier 4-5 Wind Profile Data 6-1 Wind Shape Factor 3-1 Wind Speed 6-1 Wind Zone Number 6-1 Windows Server Installation 2-11 WRC 107 Additional Input 18-15 WRC 107 Stress Calculations 18-18 WRC 107\FEA 18-1 WRC 297/ANNEX G 28-1 WRC107 Stress Summations 18-20
X
XY Coordinate Calculations 7-1
Y
Yield Stress, Operating 30-9
Z
Zero Period Acceleration 6-1 Zone Number 6-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
COADE, Inc. 12777 Jones Rd., Suite 480 Houston, Texas 77070 Phone: (281)890-4566 Fax: (281)890-3301 E-mail: techsupport@coade.com WWW: www.coade.com
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete